aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/Documentation
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorLen Brown <len.brown@intel.com>2011-03-23 02:34:54 -0400
committerLen Brown <len.brown@intel.com>2011-03-23 02:34:54 -0400
commit02e2407858fd62053bf60349c0e72cd1c7a4a60e (patch)
tree0ebdbddc97d3abbc675916010e7771065b70c137 /Documentation
parent96e1c408ea8a556c5b51e0e7d56bd2afbfbf5fe9 (diff)
parent6447f55da90b77faec1697d499ed7986bb4f6de6 (diff)
Merge branch 'linus' into release
Conflicts: arch/x86/kernel/acpi/sleep.c Signed-off-by: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
-rw-r--r--Documentation/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars75
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget31
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore41
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci31
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc21
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo53
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus100
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi110
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim48
-rw-r--r--Documentation/Changes8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/CodingStyle12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt31
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c169
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt29
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen61
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash32
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier45
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A4008
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels59
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40015
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM51
-rw-r--r--Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController80
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt17
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt5
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt73
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt93
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt98
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt253
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt28
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt38
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt26
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt45
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/Locking6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/porting7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt62
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/ads101572
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem77
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/lm755
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/lm8512
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/ltc415147
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/max663949
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/pmbus215
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/sch562722
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf60
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwmon/w83795127
-rw-r--r--Documentation/hwspinlock.txt293
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c26
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i8013
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt32
-rw-r--r--Documentation/keys-request-key.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/keys.txt28
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kref.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kvm/api.txt96
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kvm/locking.txt25
-rw-r--r--Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c (renamed from Documentation/hwmon/hpfall.c)0
-rw-r--r--Documentation/memory-barriers.txt58
-rw-r--r--Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt47
-rw-r--r--Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d (renamed from Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d)4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt130
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/bonding.txt26
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/phonet.txt67
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/devices.txt94
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt13
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/states.txt12
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/rtc.txt29
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas23
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt23
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt14
-rw-r--r--Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt89
-rw-r--r--Documentation/spinlocks.txt24
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt17
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt151
-rw-r--r--Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt16
-rw-r--r--Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt42
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/Zoran2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/vm/page-types.c105
-rw-r--r--Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt19
-rw-r--r--Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs50
-rw-r--r--Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist109
-rw-r--r--Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt167
125 files changed, 3837 insertions, 965 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 8dfc6708a257..f607367e642f 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -328,8 +328,6 @@ sysrq.txt
328 - info on the magic SysRq key. 328 - info on the magic SysRq key.
329telephony/ 329telephony/
330 - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. 330 - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
331time_interpolators.txt
332 - info on time interpolators.
333uml/ 331uml/
334 - directory with information about User Mode Linux. 332 - directory with information about User Mode Linux.
335unicode.txt 333unicode.txt
@@ -346,8 +344,6 @@ vm/
346 - directory with info on the Linux vm code. 344 - directory with info on the Linux vm code.
347volatile-considered-harmful.txt 345volatile-considered-harmful.txt
348 - Why the "volatile" type class should not be used 346 - Why the "volatile" type class should not be used
349voyager.txt
350 - guide to running Linux on the Voyager architecture.
351w1/ 347w1/
352 - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem. 348 - directory with documents regarding the 1-wire (w1) subsystem.
353watchdog/ 349watchdog/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight
index 4d637e1c4ff7..70302f370e7e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-backlight
@@ -34,3 +34,23 @@ Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net>
34Description: 34Description:
35 Maximum brightness for <backlight>. 35 Maximum brightness for <backlight>.
36Users: HAL 36Users: HAL
37
38What: /sys/class/backlight/<backlight>/type
39Date: September 2010
40KernelVersion: 2.6.37
41Contact: Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
42Description:
43 The type of interface controlled by <backlight>.
44 "firmware": The driver uses a standard firmware interface
45 "platform": The driver uses a platform-specific interface
46 "raw": The driver controls hardware registers directly
47
48 In the general case, when multiple backlight
49 interfaces are available for a single device, firmware
50 control should be preferred to platform control should
51 be preferred to raw control. Using a firmware
52 interface reduces the probability of confusion with
53 the hardware and the OS independently updating the
54 backlight state. Platform interfaces are mostly a
55 holdover from pre-standardisation of firmware
56 interfaces.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5def20b9019e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
1What: /sys/firmware/efi/vars
2Date: April 2004
3Contact: Matt Domsch <Matt_Domsch@dell.com>
4Description:
5 This directory exposes interfaces for interactive with
6 EFI variables. For more information on EFI variables,
7 see 'Variable Services' in the UEFI specification
8 (section 7.2 in specification version 2.3 Errata D).
9
10 In summary, EFI variables are named, and are classified
11 into separate namespaces through the use of a vendor
12 GUID. They also have an arbitrary binary value
13 associated with them.
14
15 The efivars module enumerates these variables and
16 creates a separate directory for each one found. Each
17 directory has a name of the form "<key>-<vendor guid>"
18 and contains the following files:
19
20 attributes: A read-only text file enumerating the
21 EFI variable flags. Potential values
22 include:
23
24 EFI_VARIABLE_NON_VOLATILE
25 EFI_VARIABLE_BOOTSERVICE_ACCESS
26 EFI_VARIABLE_RUNTIME_ACCESS
27 EFI_VARIABLE_HARDWARE_ERROR_RECORD
28 EFI_VARIABLE_AUTHENTICATED_WRITE_ACCESS
29
30 See the EFI documentation for an
31 explanation of each of these variables.
32
33 data: A read-only binary file that can be read
34 to attain the value of the EFI variable
35
36 guid: The vendor GUID of the variable. This
37 should always match the GUID in the
38 variable's name.
39
40 raw_var: A binary file that can be read to obtain
41 a structure that contains everything
42 there is to know about the variable.
43 For structure definition see "struct
44 efi_variable" in the kernel sources.
45
46 This file can also be written to in
47 order to update the value of a variable.
48 For this to work however, all fields of
49 the "struct efi_variable" passed must
50 match byte for byte with the structure
51 read out of the file, save for the value
52 portion.
53
54 **Note** the efi_variable structure
55 read/written with this file contains a
56 'long' type that may change widths
57 depending on your underlying
58 architecture.
59
60 size: As ASCII representation of the size of
61 the variable's value.
62
63
64 In addition, two other magic binary files are provided
65 in the top-level directory and are used for adding and
66 removing variables:
67
68 new_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and
69 instructs the EFI firmware to create a
70 new variable.
71
72 del_var: Takes a "struct efi_variable" and
73 instructs the EFI firmware to remove any
74 variable that has a matching vendor GUID
75 and variable key name.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..875988146a63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-spear-pcie-gadget
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
1What: /config/pcie-gadget
2Date: Feb 2011
3KernelVersion: 2.6.37
4Contact: Pratyush Anand <pratyush.anand@st.com>
5Description:
6
7 Interface is used to configure selected dual mode PCIe controller
8 as device and then program its various registers to configure it
9 as a particular device type.
10 This interfaces can be used to show spear's PCIe device capability.
11
12 Nodes are only visible when configfs is mounted. To mount configfs
13 in /config directory use:
14 # mount -t configfs none /config/
15
16 For nth PCIe Device Controller
17 /config/pcie-gadget.n/
18 link ... used to enable ltssm and read its status.
19 int_type ...used to configure and read type of supported
20 interrupt
21 no_of_msi ... used to configure number of MSI vector needed and
22 to read no of MSI granted.
23 inta ... write 1 to assert INTA and 0 to de-assert.
24 send_msi ... write MSI vector to be sent.
25 vendor_id ... used to write and read vendor id (hex)
26 device_id ... used to write and read device id (hex)
27 bar0_size ... used to write and read bar0_size
28 bar0_address ... used to write and read bar0 mapped area in hex.
29 bar0_rw_offset ... used to write and read offset of bar0 where
30 bar0_data will be written or read.
31 bar0_data ... used to write and read data at bar0_rw_offset.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ddf451ee2a08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/pstore
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
1Where: /dev/pstore/...
2Date: March 2011
3Kernel Version: 2.6.39
4Contact: tony.luck@intel.com
5Description: Generic interface to platform dependent persistent storage.
6
7 Platforms that provide a mechanism to preserve some data
8 across system reboots can register with this driver to
9 provide a generic interface to show records captured in
10 the dying moments. In the case of a panic the last part
11 of the console log is captured, but other interesting
12 data can also be saved.
13
14 # mount -t pstore -o kmsg_bytes=8000 - /dev/pstore
15
16 $ ls -l /dev/pstore
17 total 0
18 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 7896 Nov 30 15:38 dmesg-erst-1
19
20 Different users of this interface will result in different
21 filename prefixes. Currently two are defined:
22
23 "dmesg" - saved console log
24 "mce" - architecture dependent data from fatal h/w error
25
26 Once the information in a file has been read, removing
27 the file will signal to the underlying persistent storage
28 device that it can reclaim the space for later re-use.
29
30 $ rm /dev/pstore/dmesg-erst-1
31
32 The expectation is that all files in /dev/pstore
33 will be saved elsewhere and erased from persistent store
34 soon after boot to free up space ready for the next
35 catastrophe.
36
37 The 'kmsg_bytes' mount option changes the target amount of
38 data saved on each oops/panic. Pstore saves (possibly
39 multiple) files based on the record size of the underlying
40 persistent storage until at least this amount is reached.
41 Default is 10 Kbytes.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
index f979d825d112..36bf454ba855 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci
@@ -145,9 +145,11 @@ Date: July 2010
145Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com 145Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com
146Description: 146Description:
147 Reading this attribute will provide the firmware 147 Reading this attribute will provide the firmware
148 given name(SMBIOS type 41 string) of the PCI device. 148 given name (SMBIOS type 41 string or ACPI _DSM string) of
149 The attribute will be created only if the firmware 149 the PCI device. The attribute will be created only
150 has given a name to the PCI device. 150 if the firmware has given a name to the PCI device.
151 ACPI _DSM string name will be given priority if the
152 system firmware provides SMBIOS type 41 string also.
151Users: 153Users:
152 Userspace applications interested in knowing the 154 Userspace applications interested in knowing the
153 firmware assigned name of the PCI device. 155 firmware assigned name of the PCI device.
@@ -157,12 +159,27 @@ Date: July 2010
157Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com 159Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com
158Description: 160Description:
159 Reading this attribute will provide the firmware 161 Reading this attribute will provide the firmware
160 given instance(SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) 162 given instance (SMBIOS type 41 device type instance) of the
161 of the PCI device. The attribute will be created 163 PCI device. The attribute will be created only if the firmware
162 only if the firmware has given a device type instance 164 has given an instance number to the PCI device.
163 to the PCI device.
164Users: 165Users:
165 Userspace applications interested in knowing the 166 Userspace applications interested in knowing the
166 firmware assigned device type instance of the PCI 167 firmware assigned device type instance of the PCI
167 device that can help in understanding the firmware 168 device that can help in understanding the firmware
168 intended order of the PCI device. 169 intended order of the PCI device.
170
171What: /sys/bus/pci/devices/.../acpi_index
172Date: July 2010
173Contact: Narendra K <narendra_k@dell.com>, linux-bugs@dell.com
174Description:
175 Reading this attribute will provide the firmware
176 given instance (ACPI _DSM instance number) of the PCI device.
177 The attribute will be created only if the firmware has given
178 an instance number to the PCI device. ACPI _DSM instance number
179 will be given priority if the system firmware provides SMBIOS
180 type 41 device type instance also.
181Users:
182 Userspace applications interested in knowing the
183 firmware assigned instance number of the PCI
184 device that can help in understanding the firmware
185 intended order of the PCI device.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
index 90a87e2a572b..fa72ccb2282e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-rbd
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
1What: /sys/bus/rbd/ 1What: /sys/bus/rbd/
2Date: November 2010 2Date: November 2010
3Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@hq.newdream.net>, 3Contact: Yehuda Sadeh <yehuda@newdream.net>,
4 Sage Weil <sage@newdream.net> 4 Sage Weil <sage@newdream.net>
5Description: 5Description:
6 6
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a50ab655843
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-mmc
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
1What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_offset
2Date: January 2011
3Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com>
4Description:
5 Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard.
6 eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of
7 area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature
8 is enabled, this attribute will indicate the start address of
9 enhanced data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL.
10 Unit Byte. Format decimal.
11
12What: /sys/devices/.../mmc_host/mmcX/mmcX:XXXX/enhanced_area_size
13Date: January 2011
14Contact: Chuanxiao Dong <chuanxiao.dong@intel.com>
15Description:
16 Enhanced area is a new feature defined in eMMC4.4 standard.
17 eMMC4.4 or later card can support such feature. This kind of
18 area can help to improve the card performance. If the feature
19 is enabled, this attribute will indicate the size of enhanced
20 data area. If not, this attribute will be -EINVAL.
21 Unit KByte. Format decimal.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
index 7628cd1bc36a..8ffbc25376a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-power
@@ -29,9 +29,8 @@ Description:
29 "disabled" to it. 29 "disabled" to it.
30 30
31 For the devices that are not capable of generating system wakeup 31 For the devices that are not capable of generating system wakeup
32 events this file contains "\n". In that cases the user space 32 events this file is not present. In that case the device cannot
33 cannot modify the contents of this file and the device cannot be 33 be enabled to wake up the system from sleep states.
34 enabled to wake up the system.
35 34
36What: /sys/devices/.../power/control 35What: /sys/devices/.../power/control
37Date: January 2009 36Date: January 2009
@@ -85,7 +84,7 @@ Description:
85 The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number 84 The /sys/devices/.../wakeup_count attribute contains the number
86 of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This 85 of signaled wakeup events associated with the device. This
87 attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up 86 attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up
88 the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. 87 the system from sleep states, this attribute is not present.
89 88
90What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count 89What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active_count
91Date: September 2010 90Date: September 2010
@@ -95,7 +94,7 @@ Description:
95 number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with 94 number of times the processing of wakeup events associated with
96 the device was completed (at the kernel level). This attribute 95 the device was completed (at the kernel level). This attribute
97 is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the 96 is read-only. If the device is not enabled to wake up the
98 system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. 97 system from sleep states, this attribute is not present.
99 98
100What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count 99What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_hit_count
101Date: September 2010 100Date: September 2010
@@ -105,7 +104,8 @@ Description:
105 number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with 104 number of times the processing of a wakeup event associated with
106 the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state. 105 the device might prevent the system from entering a sleep state.
107 This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to 106 This attribute is read-only. If the device is not enabled to
108 wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is empty. 107 wake up the system from sleep states, this attribute is not
108 present.
109 109
110What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active 110What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_active
111Date: September 2010 111Date: September 2010
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ Description:
115 or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with 115 or 0, depending on whether or not a wakeup event associated with
116 the device is being processed (1). This attribute is read-only. 116 the device is being processed (1). This attribute is read-only.
117 If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep 117 If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep
118 states, this attribute is empty. 118 states, this attribute is not present.
119 119
120What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms 120What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_total_time_ms
121Date: September 2010 121Date: September 2010
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Description:
125 the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the 125 the total time of processing wakeup events associated with the
126 device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the 126 device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the
127 device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, 127 device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states,
128 this attribute is empty. 128 this attribute is not present.
129 129
130What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms 130What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_max_time_ms
131Date: September 2010 131Date: September 2010
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Description:
135 the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated 135 the maximum time of processing a single wakeup event associated
136 with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. 136 with the device, in milliseconds. This attribute is read-only.
137 If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep 137 If the device is not enabled to wake up the system from sleep
138 states, this attribute is empty. 138 states, this attribute is not present.
139 139
140What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms 140What: /sys/devices/.../power/wakeup_last_time_ms
141Date: September 2010 141Date: September 2010
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Description:
146 signaling the last wakeup event associated with the device, in 146 signaling the last wakeup event associated with the device, in
147 milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is 147 milliseconds. This attribute is read-only. If the device is
148 not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this 148 not enabled to wake up the system from sleep states, this
149 attribute is empty. 149 attribute is not present.
150 150
151What: /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms 151What: /sys/devices/.../power/autosuspend_delay_ms
152Date: September 2010 152Date: September 2010
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b6490e14fe83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
1What: For USB devices : /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor
2 For BT devices : /sys/class/bluetooth/hci<addr>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/report_descriptor
3 Symlink : /sys/class/hidraw/hidraw<num>/device/report_descriptor
4Date: Jan 2011
5KernelVersion: 2.0.39
6Contact: Alan Ott <alan@signal11.us>
7Description: When read, this file returns the device's raw binary HID
8 report descriptor.
9 This file cannot be written.
10Users: HIDAPI library (http://www.signal11.us/oss/hidapi)
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..55e281b0071a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-arvo
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
1What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/actual_profile
2Date: Januar 2011
3Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
4Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-5.
5 When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
6 profile which is also the profile that's active on device startup.
7 When written this attribute activates the selected profile
8 immediately.
9Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
10
11What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/button
12Date: Januar 2011
13Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
14Description: The keyboard can store short macros with consist of 1 button with
15 several modifier keys internally.
16 When written, this file lets one set the sequence for a specific
17 button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
18 included in written data. The data has to be 24 bytes long.
19 This file is writeonly.
20Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
21
22What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/info
23Date: Januar 2011
24Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
25Description: When read, this file returns some info about the device like the
26 installed firmware version.
27 The size of the data is 8 bytes in size.
28 This file is readonly.
29Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
30
31What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/key_mask
32Date: Januar 2011
33Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
34Description: The keyboard lets the user deactivate 5 certain keys like the
35 windows and application keys, to protect the user from the outcome
36 of accidentally pressing them.
37 The integer value of this attribute has bits 0-4 set depending
38 on the state of the corresponding key.
39 When read, this file returns the current state of the buttons.
40 When written, the given buttons are activated/deactivated
41 immediately.
42Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
43
44What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/arvo/roccatarvo<minor>/mode_key
45Date: Januar 2011
46Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
47Description: The keyboard has a condensed layout without num-lock key.
48 Instead it uses a mode-key which activates a gaming mode where
49 the assignment of the number block changes.
50 The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0 (OFF) to 1 (ON).
51 When read, this file returns the actual state of the key.
52 When written, the key is activated/deactivated immediately.
53Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone
index 698b8081c473..b4c4f158ab9c 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone
@@ -16,12 +16,14 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the dpi setting of the mouse with the
16 6 3200 16 6 3200
17 17
18 This file is readonly. 18 This file is readonly.
19Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
19 20
20What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile 21What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/actual_profile
21Date: March 2010 22Date: March 2010
22Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> 23Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
23Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile. 24Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile.
24 This file is readonly. 25 This file is readonly.
26Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
25 27
26What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version 28What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/firmware_version
27Date: March 2010 29Date: March 2010
@@ -32,6 +34,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
32 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the 34 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
33 left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 35 left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
34 This file is readonly. 36 This file is readonly.
37Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
35 38
36What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5] 39What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/profile[1-5]
37Date: March 2010 40Date: March 2010
@@ -47,6 +50,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
47 The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number 50 The mouse will reject invalid data, whereas the profile number
48 stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the 51 stored in the profile doesn't need to fit the number of the
49 store. 52 store.
53Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
50 54
51What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings 55What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/settings
52Date: March 2010 56Date: March 2010
@@ -57,6 +61,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
57 When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. 61 When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
58 The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid 62 The data has to be 36 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
59 data. 63 data.
64Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
60 65
61What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile 66What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/startup_profile
62Date: March 2010 67Date: March 2010
@@ -66,6 +71,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1 to 5.
66 that's active when the mouse is powered on. 71 that's active when the mouse is powered on.
67 When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile 72 When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
68 and the mouse activates this profile immediately. 73 and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
74Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
69 75
70What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu 76What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/tcu
71Date: March 2010 77Date: March 2010
@@ -77,6 +83,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a "Tracking Control Unit" which lets the user
77 Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off. 83 Writing 0 in this file will switch the TCU off.
78 Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes 84 Writing 1 in this file will start the calibration which takes
79 around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU. 85 around 6 seconds to complete and activates the TCU.
86Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
80 87
81What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight 88What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kone/roccatkone<minor>/weight
82Date: March 2010 89Date: March 2010
@@ -96,3 +103,4 @@ Description: The mouse can be equipped with one of four supplied weights
96 4 20g 103 4 20g
97 104
98 This file is readonly. 105 This file is readonly.
106Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
index 0f9f30eb1742..00efced73969 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus
@@ -4,6 +4,7 @@ Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
4Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in 4Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
5 range 0-4. 5 range 0-4.
6 This file is readonly. 6 This file is readonly.
7Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
7 8
8What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version 9What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/firmware_version
9Date: October 2010 10Date: October 2010
@@ -14,6 +15,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
14 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the 15 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
15 left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21 16 left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
16 This file is readonly. 17 This file is readonly.
18Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
17 19
18What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro 20What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/macro
19Date: October 2010 21Date: October 2010
@@ -24,6 +26,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store a macro with max 500 key/button strokes
24 button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are 26 button for a specific profile. Button and profile numbers are
25 included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long. 27 included in written data. The data has to be 2082 bytes long.
26 This file is writeonly. 28 This file is writeonly.
29Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
27 30
28What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons 31What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_buttons
29Date: August 2010 32Date: August 2010
@@ -37,6 +40,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
37 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number 40 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
38 contained in the data. 41 contained in the data.
39 This file is writeonly. 42 This file is writeonly.
43Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
40 44
41What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons 45What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
42Date: August 2010 46Date: August 2010
@@ -47,6 +51,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
47 When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. 51 When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
48 The returned data is 77 bytes in size. 52 The returned data is 77 bytes in size.
49 This file is readonly. 53 This file is readonly.
54Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
50 55
51What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings 56What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile_settings
52Date: October 2010 57Date: October 2010
@@ -61,6 +66,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
61 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number 66 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
62 contained in the data. 67 contained in the data.
63 This file is writeonly. 68 This file is writeonly.
69Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
64 70
65What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings 71What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
66Date: August 2010 72Date: August 2010
@@ -72,6 +78,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
72 When read, these files return the respective profile settings. 78 When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
73 The returned data is 43 bytes in size. 79 The returned data is 43 bytes in size.
74 This file is readonly. 80 This file is readonly.
81Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
75 82
76What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor 83What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/sensor
77Date: October 2010 84Date: October 2010
@@ -80,6 +87,7 @@ Description: The mouse has a tracking- and a distance-control-unit. These
80 can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be 87 can be activated/deactivated and the lift-off distance can be
81 set. The data has to be 6 bytes long. 88 set. The data has to be 6 bytes long.
82 This file is writeonly. 89 This file is writeonly.
90Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
83 91
84What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile 92What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/startup_profile
85Date: October 2010 93Date: October 2010
@@ -89,6 +97,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
89 that's active when the mouse is powered on. 97 that's active when the mouse is powered on.
90 When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile 98 When written, this file sets the number of the startup profile
91 and the mouse activates this profile immediately. 99 and the mouse activates this profile immediately.
100Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
92 101
93What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu 102What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu
94Date: October 2010 103Date: October 2010
@@ -97,6 +106,7 @@ Description: When written a calibration process for the tracking control unit
97 can be initiated/cancelled. 106 can be initiated/cancelled.
98 The data has to be 3 bytes long. 107 The data has to be 3 bytes long.
99 This file is writeonly. 108 This file is writeonly.
109Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
100 110
101What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image 111What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/koneplus/roccatkoneplus<minor>/tcu_image
102Date: October 2010 112Date: October 2010
@@ -106,3 +116,4 @@ Description: When read the mouse returns a 30x30 pixel image of the
106 calibration process initiated with tcu. 116 calibration process initiated with tcu.
107 The returned data is 1028 bytes in size. 117 The returned data is 1028 bytes in size.
108 This file is readonly. 118 This file is readonly.
119Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fdfa16f8189b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
1What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_cpi
2Date: January 2011
3Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
4Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-4.
5 When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
6 cpi level.
7 This file is readonly.
8Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
9
10What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_profile
11Date: January 2011
12Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
13Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
14 When read, this attribute returns the number of the active
15 profile.
16 When written, the mouse activates this profile immediately.
17 The profile that's active when powered down is the same that's
18 active when the mouse is powered on.
19Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
20
21What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_x
22Date: January 2011
23Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
24Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
25 When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
26 sensitivity in x direction.
27 This file is readonly.
28Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
29
30What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/actual_sensitivity_y
31Date: January 2011
32Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
33Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 1-10.
34 When read, this attribute returns the number of the actual
35 sensitivity in y direction.
36 This file is readonly.
37Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
38
39What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/firmware_version
40Date: January 2011
41Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
42Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
43 firmware reported by the mouse. Using the integer value eases
44 further usage in other programs. To receive the real version
45 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
46 left. E.g. a returned value of 121 means 1.21
47 This file is readonly.
48Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
49
50What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_buttons
51Date: January 2011
52Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
53Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
54 press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
55 profile_buttons holds informations about button layout.
56 When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
57 buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long.
58 The mouse will reject invalid data.
59 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
60 contained in the data.
61 This file is writeonly.
62Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
63
64What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
65Date: January 2011
66Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
67Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
68 press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
69 profile_buttons holds informations about button layout.
70 When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
71 The returned data is 23 bytes in size.
72 This file is readonly.
73Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
74
75What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile_settings
76Date: January 2011
77Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
78Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
79 press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
80 profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity
81 and light effects.
82 When written, this file lets one write the respective profile
83 settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long.
84 The mouse will reject invalid data.
85 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
86 contained in the data.
87 This file is writeonly.
88Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
89
90What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/kovaplus/roccatkovaplus<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
91Date: January 2011
92Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
93Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
94 press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons.
95 profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity
96 and light effects.
97 When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
98 The returned data is 16 bytes in size.
99 This file is readonly.
100Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
index 1c37b823f142..5fab71af3c46 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Description: It is possible to switch the cpi setting of the mouse with the
13 4 1600 13 4 1600
14 14
15 This file is readonly. 15 This file is readonly.
16Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
16 17
17What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile 18What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/actual_profile
18Date: August 2010 19Date: August 2010
@@ -20,6 +21,7 @@ Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
20Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in 21Description: When read, this file returns the number of the actual profile in
21 range 0-4. 22 range 0-4.
22 This file is readonly. 23 This file is readonly.
24Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
23 25
24What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version 26What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/firmware_version
25Date: August 2010 27Date: August 2010
@@ -30,6 +32,7 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the raw integer version number of the
30 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the 32 number the decimal point has to be shifted 2 positions to the
31 left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38 33 left. E.g. a returned value of 138 means 1.38
32 This file is readonly. 34 This file is readonly.
35Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
33 36
34What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings 37What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_settings
35Date: August 2010 38Date: August 2010
@@ -44,6 +47,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
44 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number 47 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
45 contained in the data. 48 contained in the data.
46 This file is writeonly. 49 This file is writeonly.
50Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
47 51
48What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings 52What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_settings
49Date: August 2010 53Date: August 2010
@@ -55,6 +59,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
55 When read, these files return the respective profile settings. 59 When read, these files return the respective profile settings.
56 The returned data is 13 bytes in size. 60 The returned data is 13 bytes in size.
57 This file is readonly. 61 This file is readonly.
62Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
58 63
59What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons 64What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile_buttons
60Date: August 2010 65Date: August 2010
@@ -68,6 +73,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
68 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number 73 Which profile to write is determined by the profile number
69 contained in the data. 74 contained in the data.
70 This file is writeonly. 75 This file is writeonly.
76Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
71 77
72What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons 78What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/profile[1-5]_buttons
73Date: August 2010 79Date: August 2010
@@ -78,6 +84,7 @@ Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the
78 When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. 84 When read, these files return the respective profile buttons.
79 The returned data is 19 bytes in size. 85 The returned data is 19 bytes in size.
80 This file is readonly. 86 This file is readonly.
87Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
81 88
82What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile 89What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/startup_profile
83Date: August 2010 90Date: August 2010
@@ -86,6 +93,7 @@ Description: The integer value of this attribute ranges from 0-4.
86 When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile 93 When read, this attribute returns the number of the profile
87 that's active when the mouse is powered on. 94 that's active when the mouse is powered on.
88 This file is readonly. 95 This file is readonly.
96Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
89 97
90What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings 98What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid-bus>:<vendor-id>:<product-id>.<num>/pyra/roccatpyra<minor>/settings
91Date: August 2010 99Date: August 2010
@@ -96,3 +104,4 @@ Description: When read, this file returns the settings stored in the mouse.
96 When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse. 104 When written, this file lets write settings back to the mouse.
97 The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid 105 The data has to be 3 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid
98 data. 106 data.
107Users: http://roccat.sourceforge.net
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ba9da9503c23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
1What: /sys/firmware/dmi/
2Date: February 2011
3Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com>
4Description:
5 Many machines' firmware (x86 and ia64) export DMI /
6 SMBIOS tables to the operating system. Getting at this
7 information is often valuable to userland, especially in
8 cases where there are OEM extensions used.
9
10 The kernel itself does not rely on the majority of the
11 information in these tables being correct. It equally
12 cannot ensure that the data as exported to userland is
13 without error either.
14
15 DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where
16 each entry has a common header indicating the type and
17 length of the entry, as well as 'handle' that is
18 supposed to be unique amongst all entries.
19
20 Some entries are required by the specification, but many
21 others are optional. In general though, users should
22 never expect to find a specific entry type on their
23 system unless they know for certain what their firmware
24 is doing. Machine to machine will vary.
25
26 Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order
27 to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is
28 assigned by the operating system an 'instance', which is
29 derived from an entry type's ordinal position. That is
30 to say, if there are 'N' multiple entries with the same type
31 'T' in the DMI tables (adjacent or spread apart, it
32 doesn't matter), they will be represented in sysfs as
33 entries "T-0" through "T-(N-1)":
34
35 Example entry directories:
36
37 /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-0
38 /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-1
39 /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-2
40 /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/17-3
41 ...
42
43 Instance numbers are used in lieu of the firmware
44 assigned entry handles as the kernel itself makes no
45 guarantees that handles as exported are unique, and
46 there are likely firmware images that get this wrong in
47 the wild.
48
49 Each DMI entry in sysfs has the common header values
50 exported as attributes:
51
52 handle : The 16bit 'handle' that is assigned to this
53 entry by the firmware. This handle may be
54 referred to by other entries.
55 length : The length of the entry, as presented in the
56 entry itself. Note that this is _not the
57 total count of bytes associated with the
58 entry_. This value represents the length of
59 the "formatted" portion of the entry. This
60 "formatted" region is sometimes followed by
61 the "unformatted" region composed of nul
62 terminated strings, with termination signalled
63 by a two nul characters in series.
64 raw : The raw bytes of the entry. This includes the
65 "formatted" portion of the entry, the
66 "unformatted" strings portion of the entry,
67 and the two terminating nul characters.
68 type : The type of the entry. This value is the same
69 as found in the directory name. It indicates
70 how the rest of the entry should be
71 interpreted.
72 instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the
73 given type. This value is the same as found
74 in the parent directory name.
75 position: The position of the entry within the entirety
76 of the entirety.
77
78 === Entry Specialization ===
79
80 Some entry types may have other information available in
81 sysfs.
82
83 --- Type 15 - System Event Log ---
84
85 This entry allows the firmware to export a log of
86 events the system has taken. This information is
87 typically backed by nvram, but the implementation
88 details are abstracted by this table. This entries data
89 is exported in the directory:
90
91 /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log
92
93 and has the following attributes (documented in the
94 SMBIOS / DMI specification under "System Event Log (Type 15)":
95
96 area_length
97 header_start_offset
98 data_start_offset
99 access_method
100 status
101 change_token
102 access_method_address
103 header_format
104 per_log_type_descriptor_length
105 type_descriptors_supported_count
106
107 As well, the kernel exports the binary attribute:
108
109 raw_event_log : The raw binary bits of the event log
110 as described by the DMI entry.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c1653271872a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-kim
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
1What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/dev_name
2Date: January 2010
3KernelVersion: 2.6.38
4Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com>
5Description:
6 Name of the UART device at which the WL128x chip
7 is connected. example: "/dev/ttyS0".
8 The device name flows down to architecture specific board
9 initialization file from the SFI/ATAGS bootloader
10 firmware. The name exposed is read from the user-space
11 dameon and opens the device when install is requested.
12
13What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/baud_rate
14Date: January 2010
15KernelVersion: 2.6.38
16Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com>
17Description:
18 The maximum reliable baud-rate the host can support.
19 Different platforms tend to have different high-speed
20 UART configurations, so the baud-rate needs to be set
21 locally and also sent across to the WL128x via a HCI-VS
22 command. The entry is read and made use by the user-space
23 daemon when the ldisc install is requested.
24
25What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/flow_cntrl
26Date: January 2010
27KernelVersion: 2.6.38
28Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com>
29Description:
30 The WL128x makes use of flow control mechanism, and this
31 entry most often should be 1, the host's UART is required
32 to have the capability of flow-control, or else this
33 entry can be made use of for exceptions.
34
35What: /sys/devices/platform/kim/install
36Date: January 2010
37KernelVersion: 2.6.38
38Contact: "Pavan Savoy" <pavan_savoy@ti.com>
39Description:
40 When one of the protocols Bluetooth, FM or GPS wants to make
41 use of the shared UART transport, it registers to the shared
42 transport driver, which will signal the user-space for opening,
43 configuring baud and install line discipline via this sysfs
44 entry. This entry would be polled upon by the user-space
45 daemon managing the UART, and is notified about the change
46 by the sysfs_notify. The value would be '1' when UART needs
47 to be opened/ldisc installed, and would be '0' when UART
48 is no more required and needs to be closed.
diff --git a/Documentation/Changes b/Documentation/Changes
index 4fb88f15f2ef..5f4828a034e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/Changes
+++ b/Documentation/Changes
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ o util-linux 2.10o # fdformat --version
35o module-init-tools 0.9.10 # depmod -V 35o module-init-tools 0.9.10 # depmod -V
36o e2fsprogs 1.41.4 # e2fsck -V 36o e2fsprogs 1.41.4 # e2fsck -V
37o jfsutils 1.1.3 # fsck.jfs -V 37o jfsutils 1.1.3 # fsck.jfs -V
38o reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 # reiserfsck -V 2>&1|grep reiserfsprogs 38o reiserfsprogs 3.6.3 # reiserfsck -V
39o xfsprogs 2.6.0 # xfs_db -V 39o xfsprogs 2.6.0 # xfs_db -V
40o squashfs-tools 4.0 # mksquashfs -version 40o squashfs-tools 4.0 # mksquashfs -version
41o btrfs-progs 0.18 # btrfsck 41o btrfs-progs 0.18 # btrfsck
@@ -46,9 +46,9 @@ o isdn4k-utils 3.1pre1 # isdnctrl 2>&1|grep version
46o nfs-utils 1.0.5 # showmount --version 46o nfs-utils 1.0.5 # showmount --version
47o procps 3.2.0 # ps --version 47o procps 3.2.0 # ps --version
48o oprofile 0.9 # oprofiled --version 48o oprofile 0.9 # oprofiled --version
49o udev 081 # udevinfo -V 49o udev 081 # udevd --version
50o grub 0.93 # grub --version 50o grub 0.93 # grub --version || grub-install --version
51o mcelog 0.6 51o mcelog 0.6 # mcelog --version
52o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V 52o iptables 1.4.2 # iptables -V
53 53
54 54
diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle
index 8bb37237ebd2..58b0bf917834 100644
--- a/Documentation/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle
@@ -168,6 +168,13 @@ Do not unnecessarily use braces where a single statement will do.
168if (condition) 168if (condition)
169 action(); 169 action();
170 170
171and
172
173if (condition)
174 do_this();
175else
176 do_that();
177
171This does not apply if one branch of a conditional statement is a single 178This does not apply if one branch of a conditional statement is a single
172statement. Use braces in both branches. 179statement. Use braces in both branches.
173 180
@@ -659,7 +666,7 @@ There are a number of driver model diagnostic macros in <linux/device.h>
659which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device 666which you should use to make sure messages are matched to the right device
660and driver, and are tagged with the right level: dev_err(), dev_warn(), 667and driver, and are tagged with the right level: dev_err(), dev_warn(),
661dev_info(), and so forth. For messages that aren't associated with a 668dev_info(), and so forth. For messages that aren't associated with a
662particular device, <linux/kernel.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info(). 669particular device, <linux/printk.h> defines pr_debug() and pr_info().
663 670
664Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once 671Coming up with good debugging messages can be quite a challenge; and once
665you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. Such 672you have them, they can be a huge help for remote troubleshooting. Such
@@ -819,6 +826,3 @@ language C, URL: http://www.open-std.org/JTC1/SC22/WG14/
819Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002: 826Kernel CodingStyle, by greg@kroah.com at OLS 2002:
820http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/ 827http://www.kroah.com/linux/talks/ols_2002_kernel_codingstyle_talk/html/
821 828
822--
823Last updated on 2007-July-13.
824
diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
index cfaac34c4557..6ef692667e2f 100644
--- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt
@@ -849,6 +849,37 @@ All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access
849See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated 849See the comment headers in the source code (or the docbook generated
850from them) for more information. 850from them) for more information.
851 851
852However, given that there are no fewer than four families of RCU APIs
853in the Linux kernel, how do you choose which one to use? The following
854list can be helpful:
855
856a. Will readers need to block? If so, you need SRCU.
857
858b. What about the -rt patchset? If readers would need to block
859 in an non-rt kernel, you need SRCU. If readers would block
860 in a -rt kernel, but not in a non-rt kernel, SRCU is not
861 necessary.
862
863c. Do you need to treat NMI handlers, hardirq handlers,
864 and code segments with preemption disabled (whether
865 via preempt_disable(), local_irq_save(), local_bh_disable(),
866 or some other mechanism) as if they were explicit RCU readers?
867 If so, you need RCU-sched.
868
869d. Do you need RCU grace periods to complete even in the face
870 of softirq monopolization of one or more of the CPUs? For
871 example, is your code subject to network-based denial-of-service
872 attacks? If so, you need RCU-bh.
873
874e. Is your workload too update-intensive for normal use of
875 RCU, but inappropriate for other synchronization mechanisms?
876 If so, consider SLAB_DESTROY_BY_RCU. But please be careful!
877
878f. Otherwise, use RCU.
879
880Of course, this all assumes that you have determined that RCU is in fact
881the right tool for your job.
882
852 883
8538. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES 8848. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES
854 885
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8771d832cf8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
1BIN := vrl4
2
3.PHONY: all
4all: $(BIN)
5
6.PHONY: clean
7clean:
8 rm -f *.o $(BIN)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e8a191358ad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/vrl4.c
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
1/*
2 * vrl4 format generator
3 *
4 * Copyright (C) 2010 Simon Horman
5 *
6 * This file is subject to the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public
7 * License. See the file "COPYING" in the main directory of this archive
8 * for more details.
9 */
10
11/*
12 * usage: vrl4 < zImage > out
13 * dd if=out of=/dev/sdx bs=512 seek=1 # Write the image to sector 1
14 *
15 * Reads a zImage from stdin and writes a vrl4 image to stdout.
16 * In practice this means writing a padded vrl4 header to stdout followed
17 * by the zImage.
18 *
19 * The padding places the zImage at ALIGN bytes into the output.
20 * The vrl4 uses ALIGN + START_BASE as the start_address.
21 * This is where the mask ROM will jump to after verifying the header.
22 *
23 * The header sets copy_size to min(sizeof(zImage), MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN) + ALIGN.
24 * That is, the mask ROM will load the padded header (ALIGN bytes)
25 * And then MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN bytes of the image, or the entire image,
26 * whichever is smaller.
27 *
28 * The zImage is not modified in any way.
29 */
30
31#define _BSD_SOURCE
32#include <endian.h>
33#include <unistd.h>
34#include <stdint.h>
35#include <stdio.h>
36#include <errno.h>
37
38struct hdr {
39 uint32_t magic1;
40 uint32_t reserved1;
41 uint32_t magic2;
42 uint32_t reserved2;
43 uint16_t copy_size;
44 uint16_t boot_options;
45 uint32_t reserved3;
46 uint32_t start_address;
47 uint32_t reserved4;
48 uint32_t reserved5;
49 char reserved6[308];
50};
51
52#define DECLARE_HDR(h) \
53 struct hdr (h) = { \
54 .magic1 = htole32(0xea000000), \
55 .reserved1 = htole32(0x56), \
56 .magic2 = htole32(0xe59ff008), \
57 .reserved3 = htole16(0x1) }
58
59/* Align to 512 bytes, the MMCIF sector size */
60#define ALIGN_BITS 9
61#define ALIGN (1 << ALIGN_BITS)
62
63#define START_BASE 0xe55b0000
64
65/*
66 * With an alignment of 512 the header uses the first sector.
67 * There is a 128 sector (64kbyte) limit on the data loaded by the mask ROM.
68 * So there are 127 sectors left for the boot programme. But in practice
69 * Only a small portion of a zImage is needed, 16 sectors should be more
70 * than enough.
71 *
72 * Note that this sets how much of the zImage is copied by the mask ROM.
73 * The entire zImage is present after the header and is loaded
74 * by the code in the boot program (which is the first portion of the zImage).
75 */
76#define MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN (16 * 512)
77
78#define ROUND_UP(x) ((x + ALIGN - 1) & ~(ALIGN - 1))
79
80ssize_t do_read(int fd, void *buf, size_t count)
81{
82 size_t offset = 0;
83 ssize_t l;
84
85 while (offset < count) {
86 l = read(fd, buf + offset, count - offset);
87 if (!l)
88 break;
89 if (l < 0) {
90 if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK)
91 continue;
92 perror("read");
93 return -1;
94 }
95 offset += l;
96 }
97
98 return offset;
99}
100
101ssize_t do_write(int fd, const void *buf, size_t count)
102{
103 size_t offset = 0;
104 ssize_t l;
105
106 while (offset < count) {
107 l = write(fd, buf + offset, count - offset);
108 if (l < 0) {
109 if (errno == EAGAIN || errno == EWOULDBLOCK)
110 continue;
111 perror("write");
112 return -1;
113 }
114 offset += l;
115 }
116
117 return offset;
118}
119
120ssize_t write_zero(int fd, size_t len)
121{
122 size_t i = len;
123
124 while (i--) {
125 const char x = 0;
126 if (do_write(fd, &x, 1) < 0)
127 return -1;
128 }
129
130 return len;
131}
132
133int main(void)
134{
135 DECLARE_HDR(hdr);
136 char boot_program[MAX_BOOT_PROG_LEN];
137 size_t aligned_hdr_len, alligned_prog_len;
138 ssize_t prog_len;
139
140 prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program));
141 if (prog_len <= 0)
142 return -1;
143
144 aligned_hdr_len = ROUND_UP(sizeof(hdr));
145 hdr.start_address = htole32(START_BASE + aligned_hdr_len);
146 alligned_prog_len = ROUND_UP(prog_len);
147 hdr.copy_size = htole16(aligned_hdr_len + alligned_prog_len);
148
149 if (do_write(1, &hdr, sizeof(hdr)) < 0)
150 return -1;
151 if (write_zero(1, aligned_hdr_len - sizeof(hdr)) < 0)
152 return -1;
153
154 if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0)
155 return 1;
156
157 /* Write out the rest of the kernel */
158 while (1) {
159 prog_len = do_read(0, boot_program, sizeof(boot_program));
160 if (prog_len < 0)
161 return 1;
162 if (prog_len == 0)
163 break;
164 if (do_write(1, boot_program, prog_len) < 0)
165 return 1;
166 }
167
168 return 0;
169}
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..efff8ae2713d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/zboot-rom-mmcif.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
1ROM-able zImage boot from MMC
2-----------------------------
3
4An ROM-able zImage compiled with ZBOOT_ROM_MMCIF may be written to MMC and
5SuperH Mobile ARM will to boot directly from the MMCIF hardware block.
6
7This is achieved by the mask ROM loading the first portion of the image into
8MERAM and then jumping to it. This portion contains loader code which
9copies the entire image to SDRAM and jumps to it. From there the zImage
10boot code proceeds as normal, uncompressing the image into its final
11location and then jumping to it.
12
13This code has been tested on an AP4EB board using the developer 1A eMMC
14boot mode which is configured using the following jumper settings.
15The board used for testing required a patched mask ROM in order for
16this mode to function.
17
18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 x|x|x|x|x| |x|
20S4 -+-+-+-+-+-+-+-
21 | | | | |x| |x on
22
23The zImage must be written to the MMC card at sector 1 (512 bytes) in
24vrl4 format. A utility vrl4 is supplied to accomplish this.
25
26e.g.
27 vrl4 < zImage | dd of=/dev/sdX bs=512 seek=1
28
29A dual-voltage MMC 4.0 card was used for testing.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen
deleted file mode 100644
index dc460f055647..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/ADC-LH7-Touchscreen
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
1README on the ADC/Touchscreen Controller
2========================================
3
4The LH79524 and LH7A404 include a built-in Analog to Digital
5controller (ADC) that is used to process input from a touchscreen.
6The driver only implements a four-wire touch panel protocol.
7
8The touchscreen driver is maintenance free except for the pen-down or
9touch threshold. Some resistive displays and board combinations may
10require tuning of this threshold. The driver exposes some of its
11internal state in the sys filesystem. If the kernel is configured
12with it, CONFIG_SYSFS, and sysfs is mounted at /sys, there will be a
13directory
14
15 /sys/devices/platform/adc-lh7.0
16
17containing these files.
18
19 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 samples
20 -rw-r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold
21 -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Jan 1 00:00 threshold_range
22
23The threshold is the current touch threshold. It defaults to 750 on
24most targets.
25
26 # cat threshold
27 750
28
29The threshold_range contains the range of valid values for the
30threshold. Values outside of this range will be silently ignored.
31
32 # cat threshold_range
33 0 1023
34
35To change the threshold, write a value to the threshold file.
36
37 # echo 500 > threshold
38 # cat threshold
39 500
40
41The samples file contains the most recently sampled values from the
42ADC. There are 12. Below are typical of the last sampled values when
43the pen has been released. The first two and last two samples are for
44detecting whether or not the pen is down. The third through sixth are
45X coordinate samples. The seventh through tenth are Y coordinate
46samples.
47
48 # cat samples
49 1023 1023 0 0 0 0 530 529 530 529 1023 1023
50
51To determine a reasonable threshold, press on the touch panel with an
52appropriate stylus and read the values from samples.
53
54 # cat samples
55 1023 676 92 103 101 102 855 919 922 922 1023 679
56
57The first and eleventh samples are discarded. Thus, the important
58values are the second and twelfth which are used to determine if the
59pen is down. When both are below the threshold, the driver registers
60that the pen is down. When either is above the threshold, it
61registers then pen is up.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash
deleted file mode 100644
index 8616d877df9e..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/CompactFlash
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
1README on the Compact Flash for Card Engines
2============================================
3
4There are three challenges in supporting the CF interface of the Card
5Engines. First, every IO operation must be followed with IO to
6another memory region. Second, the slot is wired for one-to-one
7address mapping *and* it is wired for 16 bit access only. Second, the
8interrupt request line from the CF device isn't wired.
9
10The IOBARRIER issue is covered in README.IOBARRIER. This isn't an
11onerous problem. Enough said here.
12
13The addressing issue is solved in the
14arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/ide-lpd7a40x.c file with some awkward
15work-arounds. We implement a special SELECT_DRIVE routine that is
16called before the IDE driver performs its own SELECT_DRIVE. Our code
17recognizes that the SELECT register cannot be modified without also
18writing a command. It send an IDLE_IMMEDIATE command on selecting a
19drive. The function also prevents drive select to the slave drive
20since there can be only one. The awkward part is that the IDE driver,
21even though we have a select procedure, also attempts to change the
22drive by writing directly the SELECT register. This attempt is
23explicitly blocked by the OUTB function--not pretty, but effective.
24
25The lack of interrupts is a more serious problem. Even though the CF
26card is fast when compared to a normal IDE device, we don't know that
27the CF is really flash. A user could use one of the very small hard
28drives being shipped with a CF interface. The IDE code includes a
29check for interfaces that lack an IRQ. In these cases, submitting a
30command to the IDE controller is followed by a call to poll for
31completion. If the device isn't immediately ready, it schedules a
32timer to poll again later.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier
deleted file mode 100644
index 2e953e228f4d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/IOBarrier
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
1README on the IOBARRIER for CardEngine IO
2=========================================
3
4Due to an unfortunate oversight when the Card Engines were designed,
5the signals that control access to some peripherals, most notably the
6SMC91C9111 ethernet controller, are not properly handled.
7
8The symptom is that some back to back IO with the peripheral returns
9unreliable data. With the SMC chip, you'll see errors about the bank
10register being 'screwed'.
11
12The cause is that the AEN signal to the SMC chip does not transition
13for every memory access. It is driven through the CPLD from the CS7
14line of the CPU's static memory controller which is optimized to
15eliminate unnecessary transitions. Yet, the SMC requires a transition
16for every write access. The Sharp website has more information about
17the effect this power-conserving feature has on peripheral
18interfacing.
19
20The solution is to follow every write access to the SMC chip with an
21access to another memory region that will force the CPU to release the
22chip select line. It is important to guarantee that this access
23forces the CPU off-chip. We map a page of SDRAM as if it were an
24uncacheable IO device and read from it after every SMC IO write
25operation.
26
27 SMC IO
28 BARRIER IO
29
30Only this sequence is important. It does not matter that there is no
31BARRIER IO before the access to the SMC chip because the AEN latch
32only needs occurs after the SMC IO write cycle. The routines that
33implement this work-around make an additional concession which is to
34disable interrupts during the IO sequence. Other hardware devices
35(the LogicPD CPLD) have registers in the same physical memory
36region as the SMC chip. An interrupt might allow an access to one of
37those registers while SMC IO is being performed.
38
39You might be tempted to think that we have to access another device
40attached to the static memory controller, but the empirical evidence
41indicates that this is not so. Mapping 0x00000000 (flash) and
420xc0000000 (SDRAM) appear to have the same effect. Using SDRAM seems
43to be faster. Choosing to access an undecoded memory region is not
44desirable as there is no way to know how that chip select will be used
45in the future.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400
deleted file mode 100644
index be32b14cd535..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/KEV7A400
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
1README on Implementing Linux for Sharp's KEV7a400
2=================================================
3
4This product has been discontinued by Sharp. For the time being, the
5partially implemented code remains in the kernel. At some point in
6the future, either the code will be finished or it will be removed
7completely. This depends primarily on how many of the development
8boards are in the field.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels
deleted file mode 100644
index fb1b21c2f2f4..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LCDPanels
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
1README on the LCD Panels
2========================
3
4Configuration options for several LCD panels, available from Logic PD,
5are included in the kernel source. This README will help you
6understand the configuration data and give you some guidance for
7adding support for other panels if you wish.
8
9
10lcd-panels.h
11------------
12
13There is no way, at present, to detect which panel is attached to the
14system at runtime. Thus the kernel configuration is static. The file
15arch/arm/mach-ld7a40x/lcd-panels.h (or similar) defines all of the
16panel specific parameters.
17
18It should be possible for this data to be shared among several device
19families. The current layout may be insufficiently general, but it is
20amenable to improvement.
21
22
23PIXEL_CLOCK
24-----------
25
26The panel data sheets will give a range of acceptable pixel clocks.
27The fundamental LCDCLK input frequency is divided down by a PCD
28constant in field '.tim2'. It may happen that it is impossible to set
29the pixel clock within this range. A clock which is too slow will
30tend to flicker. For the highest quality image, set the clock as high
31as possible.
32
33
34MARGINS
35-------
36
37These values may be difficult to glean from the panel data sheet. In
38the case of the Sharp panels, the upper margin is explicitly called
39out as a specific number of lines from the top of the frame. The
40other values may not matter as much as the panels tend to
41automatically center the image.
42
43
44Sync Sense
45----------
46
47The sense of the hsync and vsync pulses may be called out in the data
48sheet. On one panel, the sense of these pulses determine the height
49of the visible region on the panel. Most of the Sharp panels use
50negative sense sync pulses set by the TIM2_IHS and TIM2_IVS bits in
51'.tim2'.
52
53
54Pel Layout
55----------
56
57The Sharp color TFT panels are all configured for 16 bit direct color
58modes. The amba-lcd driver sets the pel mode to 565 for 5 bits of
59each red and blue and 6 bits of green.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400 b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400
deleted file mode 100644
index 3275b453bfdf..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A400
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
1README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A400-10
2=========================================================
3
4- CPLD memory mapping
5
6 The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling
7 access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste
8 because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual
9 memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every
10 register.
11
12- Serial Console
13
14 It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes
15 the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X
deleted file mode 100644
index 8c29a27e208f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/LPD7A40X
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
1README on Implementing Linux for the Logic PD LPD7A40X-10
2=========================================================
3
4- CPLD memory mapping
5
6 The board designers chose to use high address lines for controlling
7 access to the CPLD registers. It turns out to be a big waste
8 because we're using an MMU and must map IO space into virtual
9 memory. The result is that we have to make a mapping for every
10 register.
11
12- Serial Console
13
14 It may be OK not to use the serial console option if the user passes
15 the console device name to the kernel. This deserves some exploration.
16
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM
deleted file mode 100644
index 93ddc23c2faa..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/SDRAM
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
1README on the SDRAM Controller for the LH7a40X
2==============================================
3
4The standard configuration for the SDRAM controller generates a sparse
5memory array. The precise layout is determined by the SDRAM chips. A
6default kernel configuration assembles the discontiguous memory
7regions into separate memory nodes via the NUMA (Non-Uniform Memory
8Architecture) facilities. In this default configuration, the kernel
9is forgiving about the precise layout. As long as it is given an
10accurate picture of available memory by the bootloader the kernel will
11execute correctly.
12
13The SDRC supports a mode where some of the chip select lines are
14swapped in order to make SDRAM look like a synchronous ROM. Setting
15this bit means that the RAM will present as a contiguous array. Some
16programmers prefer this to the discontiguous layout. Be aware that
17may be a penalty for this feature where some some configurations of
18memory are significantly reduced; i.e. 64MiB of RAM appears as only 32
19MiB.
20
21There are a couple of configuration options to override the default
22behavior. When the SROMLL bit is set and memory appears as a
23contiguous array, there is no reason to support NUMA.
24CONFIG_LH7A40X_CONTIGMEM disables NUMA support. When physical memory
25is discontiguous, the memory tables are organized such that there are
26two banks per nodes with a small gap between them. This layout wastes
27some kernel memory for page tables representing non-existent memory.
28CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE optimizes the node tables such that
29there are no gaps. These options control the low level organization
30of the memory management tables in ways that may prevent the kernel
31from booting or may cause the kernel to allocated excessively large
32page tables. Be warned. Only change these options if you know what
33you are doing. The default behavior is a reasonable compromise that
34will suit all users.
35
36--
37
38A typical 32MiB system with the default configuration options will
39find physical memory managed as follows.
40
41 node 0: 0xc0000000 4MiB
42 0xc1000000 4MiB
43 node 1: 0xc4000000 4MiB
44 0xc5000000 4MiB
45 node 2: 0xc8000000 4MiB
46 0xc9000000 4MiB
47 node 3: 0xcc000000 4MiB
48 0xcd000000 4MiB
49
50Setting CONFIG_LH7A40X_ONE_BANK_PER_NODE will put each bank into a
51separate node.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController b/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController
deleted file mode 100644
index 23047e9861ee..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Sharp-LH/VectoredInterruptController
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
1README on the Vectored Interrupt Controller of the LH7A404
2==========================================================
3
4The 404 revision of the LH7A40X series comes with two vectored
5interrupts controllers. While the kernel does use some of the
6features of these devices, it is far from the purpose for which they
7were designed.
8
9When this README was written, the implementation of the VICs was in
10flux. It is possible that some details, especially with priorities,
11will change.
12
13The VIC support code is inspired by routines written by Sharp.
14
15
16Priority Control
17----------------
18
19The significant reason for using the VIC's vectoring is to control
20interrupt priorities. There are two tables in
21arch/arm/mach-lh7a40x/irq-lh7a404.c that look something like this.
22
23 static unsigned char irq_pri_vic1[] = { IRQ_GPIO3INTR, };
24 static unsigned char irq_pri_vic2[] = {
25 IRQ_T3UI, IRQ_GPIO7INTR,
26 IRQ_UART1INTR, IRQ_UART2INTR, IRQ_UART3INTR, };
27
28The initialization code reads these tables and inserts a vector
29address and enable for each indicated IRQ. Vectored interrupts have
30higher priority than non-vectored interrupts. So, on VIC1,
31IRQ_GPIO3INTR will be served before any other non-FIQ interrupt. Due
32to the way that the vectoring works, IRQ_T3UI is the next highest
33priority followed by the other vectored interrupts on VIC2. After
34that, the non-vectored interrupts are scanned in VIC1 then in VIC2.
35
36
37ISR
38---
39
40The interrupt service routine macro get_irqnr() in
41arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S scans the VICs for the next active
42interrupt. The vectoring makes this code somewhat larger than it was
43before using vectoring (refer to the LH7A400 implementation). In the
44case where an interrupt is vectored, the implementation will tend to
45be faster than the non-vectored version. However, the worst-case path
46is longer.
47
48It is worth noting that at present, there is no need to read
49VIC2_VECTADDR because the register appears to be shared between the
50controllers. The code is written such that if this changes, it ought
51to still work properly.
52
53
54Vector Addresses
55----------------
56
57The proper use of the vectoring hardware would jump to the ISR
58specified by the vectoring address. Linux isn't structured to take
59advantage of this feature, though it might be possible to change
60things to support it.
61
62In this implementation, the vectoring address is used to speed the
63search for the active IRQ. The address is coded such that the lowest
646 bits store the IRQ number for vectored interrupts. These numbers
65correspond to the bits in the interrupt status registers. IRQ zero is
66the lowest interrupt bit in VIC1. IRQ 32 is the lowest interrupt bit
67in VIC2. Because zero is a valid IRQ number and because we cannot
68detect whether or not there is a valid vectoring address if that
69address is zero, the eigth bit (0x100) is set for vectored interrupts.
70The address for IRQ 0x18 (VIC2) is 0x118. Only the ninth bit is set
71for the default handler on VIC1 and only the tenth bit is set for the
72default handler on VIC2.
73
74In other words.
75
76 0x000 - no active interrupt
77 0x1ii - vectored interrupt 0xii
78 0x2xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC1 (xx is don't care)
79 0x4xx - unvectored interrupt on VIC2 (xx is don't care)
80
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index 44b8b7af8019..cbdfb7d9455b 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -349,6 +349,10 @@ To mount a cgroup hierarchy with all available subsystems, type:
349The "xxx" is not interpreted by the cgroup code, but will appear in 349The "xxx" is not interpreted by the cgroup code, but will appear in
350/proc/mounts so may be any useful identifying string that you like. 350/proc/mounts so may be any useful identifying string that you like.
351 351
352Note: Some subsystems do not work without some user input first. For instance,
353if cpusets are enabled the user will have to populate the cpus and mems files
354for each new cgroup created before that group can be used.
355
352To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory 356To mount a cgroup hierarchy with just the cpuset and memory
353subsystems, type: 357subsystems, type:
354# mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /dev/cgroup 358# mount -t cgroup -o cpuset,memory hier1 /dev/cgroup
@@ -426,6 +430,14 @@ You can attach the current shell task by echoing 0:
426 430
427# echo 0 > tasks 431# echo 0 > tasks
428 432
433Note: Since every task is always a member of exactly one cgroup in each
434mounted hierarchy, to remove a task from its current cgroup you must
435move it into a new cgroup (possibly the root cgroup) by writing to the
436new cgroup's tasks file.
437
438Note: If the ns cgroup is active, moving a process to another cgroup can
439fail.
440
4292.3 Mounting hierarchies by name 4412.3 Mounting hierarchies by name
430-------------------------------- 442--------------------------------
431 443
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
index 5d0d5692a365..98a30829af7a 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ There are ways to query or modify cpusets:
693 - via the C library libcgroup. 693 - via the C library libcgroup.
694 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libcg/) 694 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libcg/)
695 - via the python application cset. 695 - via the python application cset.
696 (http://developer.novell.com/wiki/index.php/Cpuset) 696 (http://code.google.com/p/cpuset/)
697 697
698The sched_setaffinity calls can also be done at the shell prompt using 698The sched_setaffinity calls can also be done at the shell prompt using
699SGI's runon or Robert Love's taskset. The mbind and set_mempolicy 699SGI's runon or Robert Love's taskset. The mbind and set_mempolicy
@@ -725,13 +725,14 @@ Now you want to do something with this cpuset.
725 725
726In this directory you can find several files: 726In this directory you can find several files:
727# ls 727# ls
728cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.memory_spread_slab 728cgroup.clone_children cpuset.memory_pressure
729cpuset.cpus cpuset.mems 729cgroup.event_control cpuset.memory_spread_page
730cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_load_balance 730cgroup.procs cpuset.memory_spread_slab
731cpuset.mem_hardwall cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level 731cpuset.cpu_exclusive cpuset.mems
732cpuset.memory_migrate notify_on_release 732cpuset.cpus cpuset.sched_load_balance
733cpuset.memory_pressure tasks 733cpuset.mem_exclusive cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level
734cpuset.memory_spread_page 734cpuset.mem_hardwall notify_on_release
735cpuset.memory_migrate tasks
735 736
736Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset: 737Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset:
737the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using 738the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using
diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index 7781857dc940..b6ed61c95856 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -485,8 +485,9 @@ The feature can be disabled by
485 485
486# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy 486# echo 0 > memory.use_hierarchy
487 487
488NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other 488NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if either the cgroup already has other
489 cgroups created below it. 489 cgroups created below it, or if the parent cgroup has use_hierarchy
490 enabled.
490 491
491NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in 492NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in
492 case of an OOM event in any cgroup. 493 case of an OOM event in any cgroup.
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
index 737988fca64d..e74d0a2eb1cf 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
@@ -158,6 +158,17 @@ intensive calculation on your laptop that you do not care how long it
158takes to complete as you can 'nice' it and prevent it from taking part 158takes to complete as you can 'nice' it and prevent it from taking part
159in the deciding process of whether to increase your CPU frequency. 159in the deciding process of whether to increase your CPU frequency.
160 160
161sampling_down_factor: this parameter controls the rate at which the
162kernel makes a decision on when to decrease the frequency while running
163at top speed. When set to 1 (the default) decisions to reevaluate load
164are made at the same interval regardless of current clock speed. But
165when set to greater than 1 (e.g. 100) it acts as a multiplier for the
166scheduling interval for reevaluating load when the CPU is at its top
167speed due to high load. This improves performance by reducing the overhead
168of load evaluation and helping the CPU stay at its top speed when truly
169busy, rather than shifting back and forth in speed. This tunable has no
170effect on behavior at lower speeds/lower CPU loads.
171
161 172
1622.5 Conservative 1732.5 Conservative
163---------------- 174----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
index 59293ac4a5d0..6b5c42dbbe84 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-crypt.txt
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ Example scripts
41=============== 41===============
42LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk 42LUKS (Linux Unified Key Setup) is now the preferred way to set up disk
43encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see 43encryption with dm-crypt using the 'cryptsetup' utility, see
44http://clemens.endorphin.org/cryptography 44http://code.google.com/p/cryptsetup/
45 45
46[[ 46[[
47#!/bin/sh 47#!/bin/sh
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b78f691fd847
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/00-INDEX
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
1Documentation for device trees, a data structure by which bootloaders pass
2hardware layout to Linux in a device-independent manner, simplifying hardware
3probing. This subsystem is maintained by Grant Likely
4<grant.likely@secretlab.ca> and has a mailing list at
5https://lists.ozlabs.org/listinfo/devicetree-discuss
6
700-INDEX
8 - this file
9booting-without-of.txt
10 - Booting Linux without Open Firmware, describes history and format of device trees.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..918a507d1159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
1ADS1015 (I2C)
2
3This device is a 12-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs.
4
5The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations.
6
7For configuration all possible combinations are mapped to 8 channels:
8 0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1.
9 1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3.
10 2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3.
11 3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3.
12 4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND.
13 5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND.
14 6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND.
15 7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND.
16
17Each channel can be configured individually:
18 - pga is the programmable gain amplifier (values are full scale)
19 0: +/- 6.144 V
20 1: +/- 4.096 V
21 2: +/- 2.048 V (default)
22 3: +/- 1.024 V
23 4: +/- 0.512 V
24 5: +/- 0.256 V
25 - data_rate in samples per second
26 0: 128
27 1: 250
28 2: 490
29 3: 920
30 4: 1600 (default)
31 5: 2400
32 6: 3300
33
341) The /ads1015 node
35
36 Required properties:
37
38 - compatible : must be "ti,ads1015"
39 - reg : I2C bus address of the device
40 - #address-cells : must be <1>
41 - #size-cells : must be <0>
42
43 The node contains child nodes for each channel that the platform uses.
44
45 Example ADS1015 node:
46
47 ads1015@49 {
48 compatible = "ti,ads1015";
49 reg = <0x49>;
50 #address-cells = <1>;
51 #size-cells = <0>;
52
53 [ child node definitions... ]
54 }
55
562) channel nodes
57
58 Required properties:
59
60 - reg : the channel number
61
62 Optional properties:
63
64 - ti,gain : the programmable gain amplifier setting
65 - ti,datarate : the converter data rate
66
67 Example ADS1015 channel node:
68
69 channel@4 {
70 reg = <4>;
71 ti,gain = <3>;
72 ti,datarate = <5>;
73 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..569b16248514
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/ce4100-i2c.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
1CE4100 I2C
2----------
3
4CE4100 has one PCI device which is described as the I2C-Controller. This
5PCI device has three PCI-bars, each bar contains a complete I2C
6controller. So we have a total of three independent I2C-Controllers
7which share only an interrupt line.
8The driver is probed via the PCI-ID and is gathering the information of
9attached devices from the devices tree.
10Grant Likely recommended to use the ranges property to map the PCI-Bar
11number to its physical address and to use this to find the child nodes
12of the specific I2C controller. This were his exact words:
13
14 Here's where the magic happens. Each entry in
15 ranges describes how the parent pci address space
16 (middle group of 3) is translated to the local
17 address space (first group of 2) and the size of
18 each range (last cell). In this particular case,
19 the first cell of the local address is chosen to be
20 1:1 mapped to the BARs, and the second is the
21 offset from be base of the BAR (which would be
22 non-zero if you had 2 or more devices mapped off
23 the same BAR)
24
25 ranges allows the address mapping to be described
26 in a way that the OS can interpret without
27 requiring custom device driver code.
28
29This is an example which is used on FalconFalls:
30------------------------------------------------
31 i2c-controller@b,2 {
32 #address-cells = <2>;
33 #size-cells = <1>;
34 compatible = "pci8086,2e68.2",
35 "pci8086,2e68",
36 "pciclass,ff0000",
37 "pciclass,ff00";
38
39 reg = <0x15a00 0x0 0x0 0x0 0x0>;
40 interrupts = <16 1>;
41
42 /* as described by Grant, the first number in the group of
43 * three is the bar number followed by the 64bit bar address
44 * followed by size of the mapping. The bar address
45 * requires also a valid translation in parents ranges
46 * property.
47 */
48 ranges = <0 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0500 0x100
49 1 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0600 0x100
50 2 0 0x02000000 0 0xdffe0700 0x100>;
51
52 i2c@0 {
53 #address-cells = <1>;
54 #size-cells = <0>;
55 compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller";
56
57 /* The first number in the reg property is the
58 * number of the bar
59 */
60 reg = <0 0 0x100>;
61
62 /* This I2C controller has no devices */
63 };
64
65 i2c@1 {
66 #address-cells = <1>;
67 #size-cells = <0>;
68 compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller";
69 reg = <1 0 0x100>;
70
71 /* This I2C controller has one gpio controller */
72 gpio@26 {
73 #gpio-cells = <2>;
74 compatible = "ti,pcf8575";
75 reg = <0x26>;
76 gpio-controller;
77 };
78 };
79
80 i2c@2 {
81 #address-cells = <1>;
82 #size-cells = <0>;
83 compatible = "intel,ce4100-i2c-controller";
84 reg = <2 0 0x100>;
85
86 gpio@26 {
87 #gpio-cells = <2>;
88 compatible = "ti,pcf8575";
89 reg = <0x26>;
90 gpio-controller;
91 };
92 };
93 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
index c39ac2891951..89a0084df2f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc-spi-slot.txt
@@ -7,8 +7,13 @@ Required properties:
7- voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum 7- voltage-ranges : two cells are required, first cell specifies minimum
8 slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV). 8 slot voltage (mV), second cell specifies maximum slot voltage (mV).
9 Several ranges could be specified. 9 Several ranges could be specified.
10- gpios : (optional) may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO, 10
11Optional properties:
12- gpios : may specify GPIOs in this order: Card-Detect GPIO,
11 Write-Protect GPIO. 13 Write-Protect GPIO.
14- interrupts : the interrupt of a card detect interrupt.
15- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
16 services interrupts for this device.
12 17
13Example: 18Example:
14 19
@@ -20,4 +25,6 @@ Example:
20 &qe_pio_d 15 0>; 25 &qe_pio_d 15 0>;
21 voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>; 26 voltage-ranges = <3300 3300>;
22 spi-max-frequency = <50000000>; 27 spi-max-frequency = <50000000>;
28 interrupts = <42>;
29 interrupt-parent = <&PIC>;
23 }; 30 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..909a902dff85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/open-pic.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
1* Open PIC Binding
2
3This binding specifies what properties must be available in the device tree
4representation of an Open PIC compliant interrupt controller. This binding is
5based on the binding defined for Open PIC in [1] and is a superset of that
6binding.
7
8Required properties:
9
10 NOTE: Many of these descriptions were paraphrased here from [1] to aid
11 readability.
12
13 - compatible: Specifies the compatibility list for the PIC. The type
14 shall be <string> and the value shall include "open-pic".
15
16 - reg: Specifies the base physical address(s) and size(s) of this
17 PIC's addressable register space. The type shall be <prop-encoded-array>.
18
19 - interrupt-controller: The presence of this property identifies the node
20 as an Open PIC. No property value shall be defined.
21
22 - #interrupt-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
23 interrupt source. The type shall be a <u32> and the value shall be 2.
24
25 - #address-cells: Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an
26 address. The type shall be <u32> and the value shall be 0. As such,
27 'interrupt-map' nodes do not have to specify a parent unit address.
28
29Optional properties:
30
31 - pic-no-reset: The presence of this property indicates that the PIC
32 shall not be reset during runtime initialization. No property value shall
33 be defined. The presence of this property also mandates that any
34 initialization related to interrupt sources shall be limited to sources
35 explicitly referenced in the device tree.
36
37* Interrupt Specifier Definition
38
39 Interrupt specifiers consists of 2 cells encoded as
40 follows:
41
42 - <1st-cell>: The interrupt-number that identifies the interrupt source.
43
44 - <2nd-cell>: The level-sense information, encoded as follows:
45 0 = low-to-high edge triggered
46 1 = active low level-sensitive
47 2 = active high level-sensitive
48 3 = high-to-low edge triggered
49
50* Examples
51
52Example 1:
53
54 /*
55 * An Open PIC interrupt controller
56 */
57 mpic: pic@40000 {
58 // This is an interrupt controller node.
59 interrupt-controller;
60
61 // No address cells so that 'interrupt-map' nodes which reference
62 // this Open PIC node do not need a parent address specifier.
63 #address-cells = <0>;
64
65 // Two cells to encode interrupt sources.
66 #interrupt-cells = <2>;
67
68 // Offset address of 0x40000 and size of 0x40000.
69 reg = <0x40000 0x40000>;
70
71 // Compatible with Open PIC.
72 compatible = "open-pic";
73
74 // The PIC shall not be reset.
75 pic-no-reset;
76 };
77
78Example 2:
79
80 /*
81 * An interrupt generating device that is wired to an Open PIC.
82 */
83 serial0: serial@4500 {
84 // Interrupt source '42' that is active high level-sensitive.
85 // Note that there are only two cells as specified in the interrupt
86 // parent's '#interrupt-cells' property.
87 interrupts = <42 2>;
88
89 // The interrupt controller that this device is wired to.
90 interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
91 };
92
93* References
94
95[1] Power.org (TM) Standard for Embedded Power Architecture (TM) Platform
96 Requirements (ePAPR), Version 1.0, July 2008.
97 (http://www.power.org/resources/downloads/Power_ePAPR_APPROVED_v1.0.pdf)
98
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..781955f5217d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/cache_sram.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
1* Freescale PQ3 and QorIQ based Cache SRAM
2
3Freescale's mpc85xx and some QorIQ platforms provide an
4option of configuring a part of (or full) cache memory
5as SRAM. This cache SRAM representation in the device
6tree should be done as under:-
7
8Required properties:
9
10- compatible : should be "fsl,p2020-cache-sram"
11- fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle : points to the L2 controller
12- reg : offset and length of the cache-sram.
13
14Example:
15
16cache-sram@fff00000 {
17 fsl,cache-sram-ctlr-handle = <&L2>;
18 reg = <0 0xfff00000 0 0x10000>;
19 compatible = "fsl,p2020-cache-sram";
20};
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt
index 71e39cf3215b..8aa10f45ebe6 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt
@@ -1,42 +1,211 @@
1* OpenPIC and its interrupt numbers on Freescale's e500/e600 cores 1=====================================================================
2 2Freescale MPIC Interrupt Controller Node
3The OpenPIC specification does not specify which interrupt source has to 3Copyright (C) 2010,2011 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
4become which interrupt number. This is up to the software implementation 4=====================================================================
5of the interrupt controller. The only requirement is that every 5
6interrupt source has to have an unique interrupt number / vector number. 6The Freescale MPIC interrupt controller is found on all PowerQUICC
7To accomplish this the current implementation assigns the number zero to 7and QorIQ processors and is compatible with the Open PIC. The
8the first source, the number one to the second source and so on until 8notable difference from Open PIC binding is the addition of 2
9all interrupt sources have their unique number. 9additional cells in the interrupt specifier defining interrupt type
10Usually the assigned vector number equals the interrupt number mentioned 10information.
11in the documentation for a given core / CPU. This is however not true 11
12for the e500 cores (MPC85XX CPUs) where the documentation distinguishes 12PROPERTIES
13between internal and external interrupt sources and starts counting at 13
14zero for both of them. 14 - compatible
15 15 Usage: required
16So what to write for external interrupt source X or internal interrupt 16 Value type: <string>
17source Y into the device tree? Here is an example: 17 Definition: Shall include "fsl,mpic". Freescale MPIC
18 18 controllers compatible with this binding have Block
19The memory map for the interrupt controller in the MPC8544[0] shows, 19 Revision Registers BRR1 and BRR2 at offset 0x0 and
20that the first interrupt source starts at 0x5_0000 (PIC Register Address 20 0x10 in the MPIC.
21Map-Interrupt Source Configuration Registers). This source becomes the 21
22number zero therefore: 22 - reg
23 External interrupt 0 = interrupt number 0 23 Usage: required
24 External interrupt 1 = interrupt number 1 24 Value type: <prop-encoded-array>
25 External interrupt 2 = interrupt number 2 25 Definition: A standard property. Specifies the physical
26 ... 26 offset and length of the device's registers within the
27Every interrupt number allocates 0x20 bytes register space. So to get 27 CCSR address space.
28its number it is sufficient to shift the lower 16bits to right by five. 28
29So for the external interrupt 10 we have: 29 - interrupt-controller
30 0x0140 >> 5 = 10 30 Usage: required
31 31 Value type: <empty>
32After the external sources, the internal sources follow. The in core I2C 32 Definition: Specifies that this node is an interrupt
33controller on the MPC8544 for instance has the internal source number 33 controller
3427. Oo obtain its interrupt number we take the lower 16bits of its memory 34
35address (0x5_0560) and shift it right: 35 - #interrupt-cells
36 0x0560 >> 5 = 43 36 Usage: required
37 37 Value type: <u32>
38Therefore the I2C device node for the MPC8544 CPU has to have the 38 Definition: Shall be 2 or 4. A value of 2 means that interrupt
39interrupt number 43 specified in the device tree. 39 specifiers do not contain the interrupt-type or type-specific
40 40 information cells.
41[0] MPC8544E PowerQUICCTM III, Integrated Host Processor Family Reference Manual 41
42 MPC8544ERM Rev. 1 10/2007 42 - #address-cells
43 Usage: required
44 Value type: <u32>
45 Definition: Shall be 0.
46
47 - pic-no-reset
48 Usage: optional
49 Value type: <empty>
50 Definition: The presence of this property specifies that the
51 MPIC must not be reset by the client program, and that
52 the boot program has initialized all interrupt source
53 configuration registers to a sane state-- masked or
54 directed at other cores. This ensures that the client
55 program will not receive interrupts for sources not belonging
56 to the client. The presence of this property also mandates
57 that any initialization related to interrupt sources shall
58 be limited to sources explicitly referenced in the device tree.
59
60INTERRUPT SPECIFIER DEFINITION
61
62 Interrupt specifiers consists of 4 cells encoded as
63 follows:
64
65 <1st-cell> interrupt-number
66
67 Identifies the interrupt source. The meaning
68 depends on the type of interrupt.
69
70 Note: If the interrupt-type cell is undefined
71 (i.e. #interrupt-cells = 2), this cell
72 should be interpreted the same as for
73 interrupt-type 0-- i.e. an external or
74 normal SoC device interrupt.
75
76 <2nd-cell> level-sense information, encoded as follows:
77 0 = low-to-high edge triggered
78 1 = active low level-sensitive
79 2 = active high level-sensitive
80 3 = high-to-low edge triggered
81
82 <3rd-cell> interrupt-type
83
84 The following types are supported:
85
86 0 = external or normal SoC device interrupt
87
88 The interrupt-number cell contains
89 the SoC device interrupt number. The
90 type-specific cell is undefined. The
91 interrupt-number is derived from the
92 MPIC a block of registers referred to as
93 the "Interrupt Source Configuration Registers".
94 Each source has 32-bytes of registers
95 (vector/priority and destination) in this
96 region. So interrupt 0 is at offset 0x0,
97 interrupt 1 is at offset 0x20, and so on.
98
99 1 = error interrupt
100
101 The interrupt-number cell contains
102 the SoC device interrupt number for
103 the error interrupt. The type-specific
104 cell identifies the specific error
105 interrupt number.
106
107 2 = MPIC inter-processor interrupt (IPI)
108
109 The interrupt-number cell identifies
110 the MPIC IPI number. The type-specific
111 cell is undefined.
112
113 3 = MPIC timer interrupt
114
115 The interrupt-number cell identifies
116 the MPIC timer number. The type-specific
117 cell is undefined.
118
119 <4th-cell> type-specific information
120
121 The type-specific cell is encoded as follows:
122
123 - For interrupt-type 1 (error interrupt),
124 the type-specific cell contains the
125 bit number of the error interrupt in the
126 Error Interrupt Summary Register.
127
128EXAMPLE 1
129 /*
130 * mpic interrupt controller with 4 cells per specifier
131 */
132 mpic: pic@40000 {
133 compatible = "fsl,mpic";
134 interrupt-controller;
135 #interrupt-cells = <4>;
136 #address-cells = <0>;
137 reg = <0x40000 0x40000>;
138 };
139
140EXAMPLE 2
141 /*
142 * The MPC8544 I2C controller node has an internal
143 * interrupt number of 27. As per the reference manual
144 * this corresponds to interrupt source configuration
145 * registers at 0x5_0560.
146 *
147 * The interrupt source configuration registers begin
148 * at 0x5_0000.
149 *
150 * To compute the interrupt specifier interrupt number
151 *
152 * 0x560 >> 5 = 43
153 *
154 * The interrupt source configuration registers begin
155 * at 0x5_0000, and so the i2c vector/priority registers
156 * are at 0x5_0560.
157 */
158 i2c@3000 {
159 #address-cells = <1>;
160 #size-cells = <0>;
161 cell-index = <0>;
162 compatible = "fsl-i2c";
163 reg = <0x3000 0x100>;
164 interrupts = <43 2>;
165 interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
166 dfsrr;
167 };
168
169
170EXAMPLE 3
171 /*
172 * Definition of a node defining the 4
173 * MPIC IPI interrupts. Note the interrupt
174 * type of 2.
175 */
176 ipi@410a0 {
177 compatible = "fsl,mpic-ipi";
178 reg = <0x40040 0x10>;
179 interrupts = <0 0 2 0
180 1 0 2 0
181 2 0 2 0
182 3 0 2 0>;
183 };
184
185EXAMPLE 4
186 /*
187 * Definition of a node defining the MPIC
188 * global timers. Note the interrupt
189 * type of 3.
190 */
191 timer0: timer@41100 {
192 compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer";
193 reg = <0x41100 0x100>;
194 interrupts = <0 0 3 0
195 1 0 3 0
196 2 0 3 0
197 3 0 3 0>;
198 };
199
200EXAMPLE 5
201 /*
202 * Definition of an error interrupt (interupt type 1).
203 * SoC interrupt number is 16 and the specific error
204 * interrupt bit in the error interrupt summary register
205 * is 23.
206 */
207 memory-controller@8000 {
208 compatible = "fsl,p4080-memory-controller";
209 reg = <0x8000 0x1000>;
210 interrupts = <16 2 1 23>;
211 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
index bcc30bac6831..70558c3f3682 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/msi-pic.txt
@@ -5,14 +5,21 @@ Required properties:
5 first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572, 5 first is "fsl,CHIP-msi", where CHIP is the processor(mpc8610, mpc8572,
6 etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on 6 etc.) and the second is "fsl,mpic-msi" or "fsl,ipic-msi" depending on
7 the parent type. 7 the parent type.
8
8- reg : should contain the address and the length of the shared message 9- reg : should contain the address and the length of the shared message
9 interrupt register set. 10 interrupt register set.
11
10- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which 12- msi-available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which
11 msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is 13 msi interrupt can be used in the 256 msi interrupts. This property is
12 optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used. 14 optional, without this, all the 256 MSI interrupts can be used.
15 Each available range must begin and end on a multiple of 32 (i.e.
16 no splitting an individual MSI register or the associated PIC interrupt).
17
13- interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs, 18- interrupts : each one of the interrupts here is one entry per 32 MSIs,
14 and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should 19 and routed to the host interrupt controller. the interrupts should
15 be set as edge sensitive. 20 be set as edge sensitive. If msi-available-ranges is present, only
21 the interrupts that correspond to available ranges shall be present.
22
16- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller 23- interrupt-parent: the phandle for the interrupt controller
17 that services interrupts for this device. for 83xx cpu, the interrupts 24 that services interrupts for this device. for 83xx cpu, the interrupts
18 are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed 25 are routed to IPIC, and for 85xx/86xx cpu the interrupts are routed
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7382989b3052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rtc/rtc-cmos.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
1 Motorola mc146818 compatible RTC
2~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
3
4Required properties:
5 - compatible : "motorola,mc146818"
6 - reg : should contain registers location and length.
7
8Optional properties:
9 - interrupts : should contain interrupt.
10 - interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle.
11 - ctrl-reg : Contains the initial value of the control register also
12 called "Register B".
13 - freq-reg : Contains the initial value of the frequency register also
14 called "Regsiter A".
15
16"Register A" and "B" are usually initialized by the firmware (BIOS for
17instance). If this is not done, it can be performed by the driver.
18
19ISA Example:
20
21 rtc@70 {
22 compatible = "motorola,mc146818";
23 interrupts = <8 3>;
24 interrupt-parent = <&ioapic1>;
25 ctrl-reg = <2>;
26 freq-reg = <0x26>;
27 reg = <1 0x70 2>;
28 };
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c152f65f9a28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_jtaguart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
1Altera JTAG UART
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "ALTR,juart-1.0"
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..71cae3f70100
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/altera_uart.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
1Altera UART
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "ALTR,uart-1.0"
5
6Optional properties:
7- clock-frequency : frequency of the clock input to the UART
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4d9eecc2ef7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serio/altera_ps2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
1Altera UP PS/2 controller
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "ALTR,ps2-1.0".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dda375943506
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_altera.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
1Altera SPI
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "ALTR,spi-1.0".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d95c0b367a04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_oc_tiny.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
1OpenCores tiny SPI
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "opencores,tiny-spi-rtlsvn2".
5- gpios : should specify GPIOs used for chipselect.
6Optional properties:
7- clock-frequency : input clock frequency to the core.
8- baud-width: width, in bits, of the programmable divider used to scale
9 the input clock to SCLK.
10
11The clock-frequency and baud-width properties are needed only if the divider
12is programmable. They are not needed if the divider is fixed.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b49ae593a60b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/ce4100.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
1CE4100 Device Tree Bindings
2---------------------------
3
4The CE4100 SoC uses for in core peripherals the following compatible
5format: <vendor>,<chip>-<device>.
6Many of the "generic" devices like HPET or IO APIC have the ce4100
7name in their compatible property because they first appeared in this
8SoC.
9
10The CPU node
11------------
12 cpu@0 {
13 device_type = "cpu";
14 compatible = "intel,ce4100";
15 reg = <0>;
16 lapic = <&lapic0>;
17 };
18
19The reg property describes the CPU number. The lapic property points to
20the local APIC timer.
21
22The SoC node
23------------
24
25This node describes the in-core peripherals. Required property:
26 compatible = "intel,ce4100-cp";
27
28The PCI node
29------------
30This node describes the PCI bus on the SoC. Its property should be
31 compatible = "intel,ce4100-pci", "pci";
32
33If the OS is using the IO-APIC for interrupt routing then the reported
34interrupt numbers for devices is no longer true. In order to obtain the
35correct interrupt number, the child node which represents the device has
36to contain the interrupt property. Besides the interrupt property it has
37to contain at least the reg property containing the PCI bus address and
38compatible property according to "PCI Bus Binding Revision 2.1".
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d19f494f19a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/interrupt.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
1Interrupt chips
2---------------
3
4* Intel I/O Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controller (IO APIC)
5
6 Required properties:
7 --------------------
8 compatible = "intel,ce4100-ioapic";
9 #interrupt-cells = <2>;
10
11 Device's interrupt property:
12
13 interrupts = <P S>;
14
15 The first number (P) represents the interrupt pin which is wired to the
16 IO APIC. The second number (S) represents the sense of interrupt which
17 should be configured and can be one of:
18 0 - Edge Rising
19 1 - Level Low
20 2 - Level High
21 3 - Edge Falling
22
23* Local APIC
24 Required property:
25
26 compatible = "intel,ce4100-lapic";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c688af58e3bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/x86/timer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
1Timers
2------
3
4* High Precision Event Timer (HPET)
5 Required property:
6 compatible = "intel,ce4100-hpet";
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
index 28b1c9d3d351..55fd2623445b 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ Table of Contents
13 13
14 I - Introduction 14 I - Introduction
15 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc 15 1) Entry point for arch/powerpc
16 2) Entry point for arch/x86
16 17
17 II - The DT block format 18 II - The DT block format
18 1) Header 19 1) Header
@@ -225,6 +226,25 @@ it with special cases.
225 cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations 226 cannot support both configurations with Book E and configurations
226 with classic Powerpc architectures. 227 with classic Powerpc architectures.
227 228
2292) Entry point for arch/x86
230-------------------------------
231
232 There is one single 32bit entry point to the kernel at code32_start,
233 the decompressor (the real mode entry point goes to the same 32bit
234 entry point once it switched into protected mode). That entry point
235 supports one calling convention which is documented in
236 Documentation/x86/boot.txt
237 The physical pointer to the device-tree block (defined in chapter II)
238 is passed via setup_data which requires at least boot protocol 2.09.
239 The type filed is defined as
240
241 #define SETUP_DTB 2
242
243 This device-tree is used as an extension to the "boot page". As such it
244 does not parse / consider data which is already covered by the boot
245 page. This includes memory size, reserved ranges, command line arguments
246 or initrd address. It simply holds information which can not be retrieved
247 otherwise like interrupt routing or a list of devices behind an I2C bus.
228 248
229II - The DT block format 249II - The DT block format
230======================== 250========================
diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
index 58ea64a96165..e6c4b757025b 100644
--- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
+++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt
@@ -205,12 +205,20 @@ of the characters:
205 205
206The flags are: 206The flags are:
207 207
208f
209 Include the function name in the printed message
210l
211 Include line number in the printed message
212m
213 Include module name in the printed message
208p 214p
209 Causes a printk() message to be emitted to dmesg 215 Causes a printk() message to be emitted to dmesg
216t
217 Include thread ID in messages not generated from interrupt context
210 218
211Note the regexp ^[-+=][scp]+$ matches a flags specification. 219Note the regexp ^[-+=][flmpt]+$ matches a flags specification.
212Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all 220Note also that there is no convenient syntax to remove all
213the flags at once, you need to use "-psc". 221the flags at once, you need to use "-flmpt".
214 222
215 223
216Debug messages during boot process 224Debug messages during boot process
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index e4615253ba89..75c37e4c3d75 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -35,6 +35,17 @@ Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com>
35 35
36--------------------------- 36---------------------------
37 37
38What: AR9170USB
39When: 2.6.40
40
41Why: This driver is deprecated and the firmware is no longer
42 maintained. The replacement driver "carl9170" has been
43 around for a while, so the devices are still supported.
44
45Who: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
46
47---------------------------
48
38What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM 49What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM
39Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM 50Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM
40When: July 2009 51When: July 2009
@@ -566,16 +577,6 @@ Who: NeilBrown <neilb@suse.de>
566 577
567---------------------------- 578----------------------------
568 579
569What: i2c_adapter.id
570When: June 2011
571Why: This field is deprecated. I2C device drivers shouldn't change their
572 behavior based on the underlying I2C adapter. Instead, the I2C
573 adapter driver should instantiate the I2C devices and provide the
574 needed platform-specific information.
575Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
576
577----------------------------
578
579What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]() 580What: cancel_rearming_delayed_work[queue]()
580When: 2.6.39 581When: 2.6.39
581 582
@@ -596,6 +597,13 @@ Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
596 597
597---------------------------- 598----------------------------
598 599
600What: xt_connlimit rev 0
601When: 2012
602Who: Jan Engelhardt <jengelh@medozas.de>
603Files: net/netfilter/xt_connlimit.c
604
605----------------------------
606
599What: noswapaccount kernel command line parameter 607What: noswapaccount kernel command line parameter
600When: 2.6.40 608When: 2.6.40
601Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by 609Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by
@@ -611,3 +619,20 @@ Why: The original implementation of memsw feature enabled by
611Who: Michal Hocko <mhocko@suse.cz> 619Who: Michal Hocko <mhocko@suse.cz>
612 620
613---------------------------- 621----------------------------
622
623What: ipt_addrtype match include file
624When: 2012
625Why: superseded by xt_addrtype
626Who: Florian Westphal <fw@strlen.de>
627Files: include/linux/netfilter_ipv4/ipt_addrtype.h
628
629----------------------------
630
631What: i2c_driver.attach_adapter
632 i2c_driver.detach_adapter
633When: September 2011
634Why: These legacy callbacks should no longer be used as i2c-core offers
635 a variety of preferable alternative ways to instantiate I2C devices.
636Who: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
637
638----------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 4471a416c274..2e994efe12cb 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -166,13 +166,11 @@ prototypes:
166 void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); 166 void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
167locking rules: 167locking rules:
168 may block 168 may block
169get_sb yes
170mount yes 169mount yes
171kill_sb yes 170kill_sb yes
172 171
173->get_sb() returns error or 0 with locked superblock attached to the vfsmount 172->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry; its superblock should be locked
174(exclusive on ->s_umount). 173on return.
175->mount() returns ERR_PTR or the root dentry.
176->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it, 174->kill_sb() takes a write-locked superblock, does all shutdown work on it,
177unlocks and drops the reference. 175unlocks and drops the reference.
178 176
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt
index 9e8811f92b84..5949766353f7 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt
@@ -9,6 +9,9 @@ Mount options for ADFS
9 will be nnn. Default 0700. 9 will be nnn. Default 0700.
10 othmask=nnn The permission mask for ADFS 'other' permissions 10 othmask=nnn The permission mask for ADFS 'other' permissions
11 will be nnn. Default 0077. 11 will be nnn. Default 0077.
12 ftsuffix=n When ftsuffix=0, no file type suffix will be applied.
13 When ftsuffix=1, a hexadecimal suffix corresponding to
14 the RISC OS file type will be added. Default 0.
12 15
13Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions 16Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions
14------------------------------------------------ 17------------------------------------------------
@@ -55,3 +58,18 @@ Mapping of ADFS permissions to Linux permissions
55 58
56 You can therefore tailor the permission translation to whatever you 59 You can therefore tailor the permission translation to whatever you
57 desire the permissions should be under Linux. 60 desire the permissions should be under Linux.
61
62RISC OS file type suffix
63------------------------
64
65 RISC OS file types are stored in bits 19..8 of the file load address.
66
67 To enable non-RISC OS systems to be used to store files without losing
68 file type information, a file naming convention was devised (initially
69 for use with NFS) such that a hexadecimal suffix of the form ,xyz
70 denoted the file type: e.g. BasicFile,ffb is a BASIC (0xffb) file. This
71 naming convention is now also used by RISC OS emulators such as RPCEmu.
72
73 Mounting an ADFS disc with option ftsuffix=1 will cause appropriate file
74 type suffixes to be appended to file names read from a directory. If the
75 ftsuffix option is zero or omitted, no file type suffixes will be added.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
index bc0b9cfe095b..983e14abe7e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs.txt
@@ -46,3 +46,10 @@ data server cache
46file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module 46file driver devices refer to data servers, which are kept in a module
47level cache. Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid 47level cache. Its reference is held over the lifetime of the deviceid
48pointing to it. 48pointing to it.
49
50lseg
51----
52lseg maintains an extra reference corresponding to the NFS_LSEG_VALID
53bit which holds it in the pnfs_layout_hdr's list. When the final lseg
54is removed from the pnfs_layout_hdr's list, the NFS_LAYOUT_DESTROYED
55bit is set, preventing any new lsegs from being added.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/porting b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
index dfbcd1b00b0a..0c986c9e8519 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/porting
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/porting
@@ -394,3 +394,10 @@ file) you must return -EOPNOTSUPP if FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE is set in mode.
394Currently you can only have FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE set, 394Currently you can only have FALLOC_FL_PUNCH_HOLE with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE set,
395so the i_size should not change when hole punching, even when puching the end of 395so the i_size should not change when hole punching, even when puching the end of
396a file off. 396a file off.
397
398--
399[mandatory]
400 ->get_sb() is gone. Switch to use of ->mount(). Typically it's just
401a matter of switching from calling get_sb_... to mount_... and changing the
402function type. If you were doing it manually, just switch from setting ->mnt_root
403to some pointer to returning that pointer. On errors return ERR_PTR(...).
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt
index 2d2a7b2a16b9..e2b07cc9120a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/romfs.txt
@@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ comparison, an actual rescue disk used up 3202 blocks with ext2, while
17with romfs, it needed 3079 blocks. 17with romfs, it needed 3079 blocks.
18 18
19To create such a file system, you'll need a user program named 19To create such a file system, you'll need a user program named
20genromfs. It is available via anonymous ftp on sunsite.unc.edu and 20genromfs. It is available on http://romfs.sourceforge.net/
21its mirrors, in the /pub/Linux/system/recovery/ directory.
22 21
23As the name suggests, romfs could be also used (space-efficiently) on 22As the name suggests, romfs could be also used (space-efficiently) on
24various read-only media, like (E)EPROM disks if someone will have the 23various read-only media, like (E)EPROM disks if someone will have the
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
index 5d1335faec2d..f806e50aaa63 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
@@ -39,10 +39,12 @@ userspace. Top-level directories in sysfs represent the common
39ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects 39ancestors of object hierarchies; i.e. the subsystems the objects
40belong to. 40belong to.
41 41
42Sysfs internally stores the kobject that owns the directory in the 42Sysfs internally stores a pointer to the kobject that implements a
43->d_fsdata pointer of the directory's dentry. This allows sysfs to do 43directory in the sysfs_dirent object associated with the directory. In
44reference counting directly on the kobject when the file is opened and 44the past this kobject pointer has been used by sysfs to do reference
45closed. 45counting directly on the kobject whenever the file is opened or closed.
46With the current sysfs implementation the kobject reference count is
47only modified directly by the function sysfs_schedule_callback().
46 48
47 49
48Attributes 50Attributes
@@ -208,9 +210,9 @@ Other notes:
208 is 4096. 210 is 4096.
209 211
210- show() methods should return the number of bytes printed into the 212- show() methods should return the number of bytes printed into the
211 buffer. This is the return value of snprintf(). 213 buffer. This is the return value of scnprintf().
212 214
213- show() should always use snprintf(). 215- show() should always use scnprintf().
214 216
215- store() should return the number of bytes used from the buffer. If the 217- store() should return the number of bytes used from the buffer. If the
216 entire buffer has been used, just return the count argument. 218 entire buffer has been used, just return the count argument.
@@ -229,7 +231,7 @@ A very simple (and naive) implementation of a device attribute is:
229static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, 231static ssize_t show_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
230 char *buf) 232 char *buf)
231{ 233{
232 return snprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name); 234 return scnprintf(buf, PAGE_SIZE, "%s\n", dev->name);
233} 235}
234 236
235static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr, 237static ssize_t store_name(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
index 12fedb7834c6..d7b13b01e980 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ubifs.txt
@@ -82,12 +82,12 @@ Mount options
82bulk_read read more in one go to take advantage of flash 82bulk_read read more in one go to take advantage of flash
83 media that read faster sequentially 83 media that read faster sequentially
84no_bulk_read (*) do not bulk-read 84no_bulk_read (*) do not bulk-read
85no_chk_data_crc skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to 85no_chk_data_crc (*) skip checking of CRCs on data nodes in order to
86 improve read performance. Use this option only 86 improve read performance. Use this option only
87 if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect 87 if the flash media is highly reliable. The effect
88 of this option is that corruption of the contents 88 of this option is that corruption of the contents
89 of a file can go unnoticed. 89 of a file can go unnoticed.
90chk_data_crc (*) do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes 90chk_data_crc do not skip checking CRCs on data nodes
91compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none" 91compr=none override default compressor and set it to "none"
92compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo" 92compr=lzo override default compressor and set it to "lzo"
93compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib" 93compr=zlib override default compressor and set it to "zlib"
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index 94cf97b901d7..306f0ae8df09 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -95,10 +95,11 @@ functions:
95 extern int unregister_filesystem(struct file_system_type *); 95 extern int unregister_filesystem(struct file_system_type *);
96 96
97The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a 97The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a
98request is made to mount a device onto a directory in your filespace, 98request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your namespace,
99the VFS will call the appropriate get_sb() method for the specific 99the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the specific
100filesystem. The dentry for the mount point will then be updated to 100filesystem. New vfsmount refering to the tree returned by ->mount()
101point to the root inode for the new filesystem. 101will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname resolution
102reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that vfsmount.
102 103
103You can see all filesystems that are registered to the kernel in the 104You can see all filesystems that are registered to the kernel in the
104file /proc/filesystems. 105file /proc/filesystems.
@@ -107,14 +108,14 @@ file /proc/filesystems.
107struct file_system_type 108struct file_system_type
108----------------------- 109-----------------------
109 110
110This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.22, the following 111This describes the filesystem. As of kernel 2.6.39, the following
111members are defined: 112members are defined:
112 113
113struct file_system_type { 114struct file_system_type {
114 const char *name; 115 const char *name;
115 int fs_flags; 116 int fs_flags;
116 int (*get_sb) (struct file_system_type *, int, 117 struct dentry (*mount) (struct file_system_type *, int,
117 const char *, void *, struct vfsmount *); 118 const char *, void *);
118 void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *); 119 void (*kill_sb) (struct super_block *);
119 struct module *owner; 120 struct module *owner;
120 struct file_system_type * next; 121 struct file_system_type * next;
@@ -128,11 +129,11 @@ struct file_system_type {
128 129
129 fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.) 130 fs_flags: various flags (i.e. FS_REQUIRES_DEV, FS_NO_DCACHE, etc.)
130 131
131 get_sb: the method to call when a new instance of this 132 mount: the method to call when a new instance of this
132 filesystem should be mounted 133 filesystem should be mounted
133 134
134 kill_sb: the method to call when an instance of this filesystem 135 kill_sb: the method to call when an instance of this filesystem
135 should be unmounted 136 should be shut down
136 137
137 owner: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE in 138 owner: for internal VFS use: you should initialize this to THIS_MODULE in
138 most cases. 139 most cases.
@@ -141,7 +142,7 @@ struct file_system_type {
141 142
142 s_lock_key, s_umount_key: lockdep-specific 143 s_lock_key, s_umount_key: lockdep-specific
143 144
144The get_sb() method has the following arguments: 145The mount() method has the following arguments:
145 146
146 struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized 147 struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized
147 by the specific filesystem code 148 by the specific filesystem code
@@ -153,32 +154,39 @@ The get_sb() method has the following arguments:
153 void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII 154 void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII
154 string (see "Mount Options" section) 155 string (see "Mount Options" section)
155 156
156 struct vfsmount *mnt: a vfs-internal representation of a mount point 157The mount() method must return the root dentry of the tree requested by
158caller. An active reference to its superblock must be grabbed and the
159superblock must be locked. On failure it should return ERR_PTR(error).
157 160
158The get_sb() method must determine if the block device specified 161The arguments match those of mount(2) and their interpretation
159in the dev_name and fs_type contains a filesystem of the type the method 162depends on filesystem type. E.g. for block filesystems, dev_name is
160supports. If it succeeds in opening the named block device, it initializes a 163interpreted as block device name, that device is opened and if it
161struct super_block descriptor for the filesystem contained by the block device. 164contains a suitable filesystem image the method creates and initializes
162On failure it returns an error. 165struct super_block accordingly, returning its root dentry to caller.
166
167->mount() may choose to return a subtree of existing filesystem - it
168doesn't have to create a new one. The main result from the caller's
169point of view is a reference to dentry at the root of (sub)tree to
170be attached; creation of new superblock is a common side effect.
163 171
164The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the 172The most interesting member of the superblock structure that the
165get_sb() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to 173mount() method fills in is the "s_op" field. This is a pointer to
166a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the 174a "struct super_operations" which describes the next level of the
167filesystem implementation. 175filesystem implementation.
168 176
169Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic get_sb() implementations 177Usually, a filesystem uses one of the generic mount() implementations
170and provides a fill_super() method instead. The generic methods are: 178and provides a fill_super() callback instead. The generic variants are:
171 179
172 get_sb_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device 180 mount_bdev: mount a filesystem residing on a block device
173 181
174 get_sb_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device 182 mount_nodev: mount a filesystem that is not backed by a device
175 183
176 get_sb_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between 184 mount_single: mount a filesystem which shares the instance between
177 all mounts 185 all mounts
178 186
179A fill_super() method implementation has the following arguments: 187A fill_super() callback implementation has the following arguments:
180 188
181 struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The method fill_super() 189 struct super_block *sb: the superblock structure. The callback
182 must initialize this properly. 190 must initialize this properly.
183 191
184 void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII 192 void *data: arbitrary mount options, usually comes as an ASCII
@@ -865,7 +873,7 @@ struct dentry_operations {
865 void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *); 873 void (*d_iput)(struct dentry *, struct inode *);
866 char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int); 874 char *(*d_dname)(struct dentry *, char *, int);
867 struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *); 875 struct vfsmount *(*d_automount)(struct path *);
868 int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool, bool); 876 int (*d_manage)(struct dentry *, bool);
869}; 877};
870 878
871 d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This 879 d_revalidate: called when the VFS needs to revalidate a dentry. This
@@ -961,10 +969,6 @@ struct dentry_operations {
961 mounted on it and not to check the automount flag. Any other error 969 mounted on it and not to check the automount flag. Any other error
962 code will abort pathwalk completely. 970 code will abort pathwalk completely.
963 971
964 If the 'mounting_here' parameter is true, then namespace_sem is being
965 held by the caller and the function should not initiate any mounts or
966 unmounts that it will then wait for.
967
968 If the 'rcu_walk' parameter is true, then the caller is doing a 972 If the 'rcu_walk' parameter is true, then the caller is doing a
969 pathwalk in RCU-walk mode. Sleeping is not permitted in this mode, 973 pathwalk in RCU-walk mode. Sleeping is not permitted in this mode,
970 and the caller can be asked to leave it and call again by returing 974 and the caller can be asked to leave it and call again by returing
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt
index 7445bf335dae..5282e3e51413 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt
@@ -791,10 +791,3 @@ mount option. Fundamentally, there is no reason why the log manager would not
791be able to swap methods automatically and transparently depending on load 791be able to swap methods automatically and transparently depending on load
792characteristics, but this should not be necessary if delayed logging works as 792characteristics, but this should not be necessary if delayed logging works as
793designed. 793designed.
794
795Roadmap:
796
7972.6.39 Switch default mount option to use delayed logging
798 => should be roughly 12 months after initial merge
799 => enough time to shake out remaining problems before next round of
800 enterprise distro kernel rebases
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015 b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f6fe9c203733
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ads1015
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
1Kernel driver ads1015
2=====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Texas Instruments ADS1015
6 Prefix: 'ads1015'
7 Datasheet: Publicly available at the Texas Instruments website :
8 http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ads1015.pdf
9
10Authors:
11 Dirk Eibach, Guntermann & Drunck GmbH <eibach@gdsys.de>
12
13Description
14-----------
15
16This driver implements support for the Texas Instruments ADS1015.
17
18This device is a 12-bit A-D converter with 4 inputs.
19
20The inputs can be used single ended or in certain differential combinations.
21
22The inputs can be made available by 8 sysfs input files in0_input - in7_input:
23in0: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN1.
24in1: Voltage over AIN0 and AIN3.
25in2: Voltage over AIN1 and AIN3.
26in3: Voltage over AIN2 and AIN3.
27in4: Voltage over AIN0 and GND.
28in5: Voltage over AIN1 and GND.
29in6: Voltage over AIN2 and GND.
30in7: Voltage over AIN3 and GND.
31
32Which inputs are available can be configured using platform data or devicetree.
33
34By default all inputs are exported.
35
36Platform Data
37-------------
38
39In linux/i2c/ads1015.h platform data is defined, channel_data contains
40configuration data for the used input combinations:
41- pga is the programmable gain amplifier (values are full scale)
42 0: +/- 6.144 V
43 1: +/- 4.096 V
44 2: +/- 2.048 V
45 3: +/- 1.024 V
46 4: +/- 0.512 V
47 5: +/- 0.256 V
48- data_rate in samples per second
49 0: 128
50 1: 250
51 2: 490
52 3: 920
53 4: 1600
54 5: 2400
55 6: 3300
56
57Example:
58struct ads1015_platform_data data = {
59 .channel_data = {
60 [2] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 1, .data_rate = 0 },
61 [4] = { .enabled = true, .pga = 4, .data_rate = 5 },
62 }
63};
64
65In this case only in2_input (FS +/- 4.096 V, 128 SPS) and in4_input
66(FS +/- 0.512 V, 2400 SPS) would be created.
67
68Devicetree
69----------
70
71Configuration is also possible via devicetree:
72Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/ads1015.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
index a7952c2bd959..4d0bc70f1852 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg
@@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Supported chips:
10 Prefix: 'f71862fg' 10 Prefix: 'f71862fg'
11 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space 11 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
12 Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website 12 Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
13 * Fintek F71869F and F71869E
14 Prefix: 'f71869'
15 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
16 Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
13 * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG 17 * Fintek F71882FG and F71883FG
14 Prefix: 'f71882fg' 18 Prefix: 'f71882fg'
15 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space 19 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
@@ -17,6 +21,10 @@ Supported chips:
17 * Fintek F71889FG 21 * Fintek F71889FG
18 Prefix: 'f71889fg' 22 Prefix: 'f71889fg'
19 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space 23 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
24 Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website
25 * Fintek F71889ED
26 Prefix: 'f71889ed'
27 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
20 Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon 28 Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon
21 * Fintek F8000 29 * Fintek F8000
22 Prefix: 'f8000' 30 Prefix: 'f8000'
@@ -29,9 +37,9 @@ Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
29Description 37Description
30----------- 38-----------
31 39
32Fintek F718xxFG/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring 40Fintek F718xx/F8000 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring
33capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages (3 for the F8000), 4 fans and 41capabilities. They can monitor up to 9 voltages, 4 fans and 3 temperature
343 temperature sensors. 42sensors.
35 43
36These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in 44These chips also have fan controlling features, using either DC or PWM, in
37three different modes (one manual, two automatic). 45three different modes (one manual, two automatic).
@@ -99,5 +107,5 @@ Writing an unsupported mode will result in an invalid parameter error.
99 The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between 107 The fan speed is regulated to keep the temp the fan is mapped to between
100 temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp. 108 temp#_auto_point2_temp and temp#_auto_point3_temp.
101 109
102Both of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to 110All of the automatic modes require that pwm1 corresponds to fan1, pwm2 to
103fan2 and pwm3 to fan3. 111fan2 and pwm3 to fan3.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ba5ed126858
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lineage-pem
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
1Kernel driver lineage-pem
2=========================
3
4Supported devices:
5 * Lineage Compact Power Line Power Entry Modules
6 Prefix: 'lineage-pem'
7 Addresses scanned: -
8 Documentation:
9 http://www.lineagepower.com/oem/pdf/CPLI2C.pdf
10
11Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
12
13
14Description
15-----------
16
17This driver supports various Lineage Compact Power Line DC/DC and AC/DC
18converters such as CP1800, CP2000AC, CP2000DC, CP2100DC, and others.
19
20Lineage CPL power entry modules are nominally PMBus compliant. However, most
21standard PMBus commands are not supported. Specifically, all hardware monitoring
22and status reporting commands are non-standard. For this reason, a standard
23PMBus driver can not be used.
24
25
26Usage Notes
27-----------
28
29This driver does not probe for Lineage CPL devices, since there is no register
30which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
31the devices explicitly.
32
33Example: the following will load the driver for a Lineage PEM at address 0x40
34on I2C bus #1:
35$ modprobe lineage-pem
36$ echo lineage-pem 0x40 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
37
38All Lineage CPL power entry modules have a built-in I2C bus master selector
39(PCA9541). To ensure device access, this driver should only be used as client
40driver to the pca9541 I2C master selector driver.
41
42
43Sysfs entries
44-------------
45
46All Lineage CPL devices report output voltage and device temperature as well as
47alarms for output voltage, temperature, input voltage, input current, input power,
48and fan status.
49
50Input voltage, input current, input power, and fan speed measurement is only
51supported on newer devices. The driver detects if those attributes are supported,
52and only creates respective sysfs entries if they are.
53
54in1_input Output voltage (mV)
55in1_min_alarm Output undervoltage alarm
56in1_max_alarm Output overvoltage alarm
57in1_crit Output voltage critical alarm
58
59in2_input Input voltage (mV, optional)
60in2_alarm Input voltage alarm
61
62curr1_input Input current (mA, optional)
63curr1_alarm Input overcurrent alarm
64
65power1_input Input power (uW, optional)
66power1_alarm Input power alarm
67
68fan1_input Fan 1 speed (rpm, optional)
69fan2_input Fan 2 speed (rpm, optional)
70fan3_input Fan 3 speed (rpm, optional)
71
72temp1_input
73temp1_max
74temp1_crit
75temp1_alarm
76temp1_crit_alarm
77temp1_fault
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
index 8e6356fe05d7..a1790401fdde 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm75
@@ -7,6 +7,11 @@ Supported chips:
7 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f 7 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
8 Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website 8 Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
9 http://www.national.com/ 9 http://www.national.com/
10 * National Semiconductor LM75A
11 Prefix: 'lm75a'
12 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
13 Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
14 http://www.national.com/
10 * Dallas Semiconductor DS75 15 * Dallas Semiconductor DS75
11 Prefix: 'lm75' 16 Prefix: 'lm75'
12 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f 17 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x48 - 0x4f
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
index 239258a63c81..7c49feaa79d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm85
@@ -26,6 +26,14 @@ Supported chips:
26 Prefix: 'emc6d102' 26 Prefix: 'emc6d102'
27 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e 27 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
28 Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html 28 Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d102.html
29 * SMSC EMC6D103
30 Prefix: 'emc6d103'
31 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
32 Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103.html
33 * SMSC EMC6D103S
34 Prefix: 'emc6d103s'
35 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
36 Datasheet: http://www.smsc.com/main/catalog/emc6d103s.html
29 37
30Authors: 38Authors:
31 Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>, 39 Philip Pokorny <ppokorny@penguincomputing.com>,
@@ -122,9 +130,11 @@ to be register compatible. The EMC6D100 offers all the features of the
122EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features. 130EMC6D101 plus additional voltage monitoring and system control features.
123Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package 131Unfortunately it is not possible to distinguish between the package
124versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read 132versions on register level so these additional voltage inputs may read
125zero. The EMC6D102 features addtional ADC bits thus extending precision 133zero. EMC6D102 and EMC6D103 feature additional ADC bits thus extending precision
126of voltage and temperature channels. 134of voltage and temperature channels.
127 135
136SMSC EMC6D103S is similar to EMC6D103, but does not support pwm#_auto_pwm_minctl
137and temp#_auto_temp_off.
128 138
129Hardware Configurations 139Hardware Configurations
130----------------------- 140-----------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151 b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..43c667e6677a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ltc4151
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
1Kernel driver ltc4151
2=====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Linear Technology LTC4151
6 Prefix: 'ltc4151'
7 Addresses scanned: -
8 Datasheet:
9 http://www.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/4151fc.pdf
10
11Author: Per Dalen <per.dalen@appeartv.com>
12
13
14Description
15-----------
16
17The LTC4151 is a High Voltage I2C Current and Voltage Monitor.
18
19
20Usage Notes
21-----------
22
23This driver does not probe for LTC4151 devices, since there is no register
24which can be safely used to identify the chip. You will have to instantiate
25the devices explicitly.
26
27Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC4151 at address 0x6f
28on I2C bus #0:
29# modprobe ltc4151
30# echo ltc4151 0x6f > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-0/new_device
31
32
33Sysfs entries
34-------------
35
36Voltage readings provided by this driver are reported as obtained from the ADIN
37and VIN registers.
38
39Current reading provided by this driver is reported as obtained from the Current
40Sense register. The reported value assumes that a 1 mOhm sense resistor is
41installed.
42
43in1_input VDIN voltage (mV)
44
45in2_input ADIN voltage (mV)
46
47curr1_input SENSE current (mA)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max6639 b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..dc49f8be7167
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max6639
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
1Kernel driver max6639
2=====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Maxim MAX6639
6 Prefix: 'max6639'
7 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2e, 0x2f
8 Datasheet: http://pdfserv.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX6639.pdf
9
10Authors:
11 He Changqing <hechangqing@semptian.com>
12 Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de>
13
14Description
15-----------
16
17This driver implements support for the Maxim MAX6639. This chip is a 2-channel
18temperature monitor with dual PWM fan speed controller. It can monitor its own
19temperature and one external diode-connected transistor or two external
20diode-connected transistors.
21
22The following device attributes are implemented via sysfs:
23
24Attribute R/W Contents
25----------------------------------------------------------------------------
26temp1_input R Temperature channel 1 input (0..150 C)
27temp2_input R Temperature channel 2 input (0..150 C)
28temp1_fault R Temperature channel 1 diode fault
29temp2_fault R Temperature channel 2 diode fault
30temp1_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 1
31 (in C, see datasheet)
32temp2_max RW Set THERM temperature for input 2
33temp1_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 1
34temp2_crit RW Set ALERT temperature for input 2
35temp1_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 1
36 (in C, see datasheet)
37temp2_emergency RW Set OT temperature for input 2
38pwm1 RW Fan 1 target duty cycle (0..255)
39pwm2 RW Fan 2 target duty cycle (0..255)
40fan1_input R TACH1 fan tachometer input (in RPM)
41fan2_input R TACH2 fan tachometer input (in RPM)
42fan1_fault R Fan 1 fault
43fan2_fault R Fan 2 fault
44temp1_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 1
45temp2_max_alarm R Alarm on THERM temperature on channel 2
46temp1_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 1
47temp2_crit_alarm R Alarm on ALERT temperature on channel 2
48temp1_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 1
49temp2_emergency_alarm R Alarm on OT temperature on channel 2
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f2d42e8bdf48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
1Kernel driver pmbus
2====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Ericsson BMR45X series
6 DC/DC Converter
7 Prefixes: 'bmr450', 'bmr451', 'bmr453', 'bmr454'
8 Addresses scanned: -
9 Datasheet:
10 http://archive.ericsson.net/service/internet/picov/get?DocNo=28701-EN/LZT146395
11 * Linear Technology LTC2978
12 Octal PMBus Power Supply Monitor and Controller
13 Prefix: 'ltc2978'
14 Addresses scanned: -
15 Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf
16 * Maxim MAX16064
17 Quad Power-Supply Controller
18 Prefix: 'max16064'
19 Addresses scanned: -
20 Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf
21 * Maxim MAX34440
22 PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager
23 Prefixes: 'max34440'
24 Addresses scanned: -
25 Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf
26 * Maxim MAX34441
27 PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller
28 Prefixes: 'max34441'
29 Addresses scanned: -
30 Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf
31 * Maxim MAX8688
32 Digital Power-Supply Controller/Monitor
33 Prefix: 'max8688'
34 Addresses scanned: -
35 Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf
36 * Generic PMBus devices
37 Prefix: 'pmbus'
38 Addresses scanned: -
39 Datasheet: n.a.
40
41Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
42
43
44Description
45-----------
46
47This driver supports hardware montoring for various PMBus compliant devices.
48It supports voltage, current, power, and temperature sensors as supported
49by the device.
50
51Each monitored channel has its own high and low limits, plus a critical
52limit.
53
54Fan support will be added in a later version of this driver.
55
56
57Usage Notes
58-----------
59
60This driver does not probe for PMBus devices, since there is no register
61which can be safely used to identify the chip (The MFG_ID register is not
62supported by all chips), and since there is no well defined address range for
63PMBus devices. You will have to instantiate the devices explicitly.
64
65Example: the following will load the driver for an LTC2978 at address 0x60
66on I2C bus #1:
67$ modprobe pmbus
68$ echo ltc2978 0x60 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/i2c-1/new_device
69
70
71Platform data support
72---------------------
73
74Support for additional PMBus chips can be added by defining chip parameters in
75a new chip specific driver file. For example, (untested) code to add support for
76Emerson DS1200 power modules might look as follows.
77
78static struct pmbus_driver_info ds1200_info = {
79 .pages = 1,
80 /* Note: All other sensors are in linear mode */
81 .direct[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = true,
82 .direct[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = true,
83 .direct[PSC_CURRENT_OUT] = true,
84 .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 1,
85 .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 0,
86 .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_IN] = 3,
87 .m[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 1,
88 .b[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 0,
89 .R[PSC_VOLTAGE_OUT] = 3,
90 .m[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 1,
91 .b[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 0,
92 .R[PSC_TEMPERATURE] = 3,
93 .func[0] = PMBUS_HAVE_VIN | PMBUS_HAVE_IIN | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_INPUT
94 | PMBUS_HAVE_VOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_VOUT
95 | PMBUS_HAVE_IOUT | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_IOUT
96 | PMBUS_HAVE_PIN | PMBUS_HAVE_POUT
97 | PMBUS_HAVE_TEMP | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_TEMP
98 | PMBUS_HAVE_FAN12 | PMBUS_HAVE_STATUS_FAN12,
99};
100
101static int ds1200_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
102 const struct i2c_device_id *id)
103{
104 return pmbus_do_probe(client, id, &ds1200_info);
105}
106
107static int ds1200_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
108{
109 return pmbus_do_remove(client);
110}
111
112static const struct i2c_device_id ds1200_id[] = {
113 {"ds1200", 0},
114 {}
115};
116
117MODULE_DEVICE_TABLE(i2c, ds1200_id);
118
119/* This is the driver that will be inserted */
120static struct i2c_driver ds1200_driver = {
121 .driver = {
122 .name = "ds1200",
123 },
124 .probe = ds1200_probe,
125 .remove = ds1200_remove,
126 .id_table = ds1200_id,
127};
128
129static int __init ds1200_init(void)
130{
131 return i2c_add_driver(&ds1200_driver);
132}
133
134static void __exit ds1200_exit(void)
135{
136 i2c_del_driver(&ds1200_driver);
137}
138
139
140Sysfs entries
141-------------
142
143When probing the chip, the driver identifies which PMBus registers are
144supported, and determines available sensors from this information.
145Attribute files only exist if respective sensors are suported by the chip.
146Labels are provided to inform the user about the sensor associated with
147a given sysfs entry.
148
149The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other
150attributes are read-only.
151
152inX_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register.
153inX_min Minumum Voltage.
154 From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register.
155inX_max Maximum voltage.
156 From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register.
157inX_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage.
158 From VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
159inX_crit Critical maximum voltage.
160 From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register.
161inX_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status.
162inX_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status.
163inX_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm.
164 From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status.
165inX_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm.
166 From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status.
167inX_label "vin", "vcap", or "voutY"
168
169currX_input Measured current. From READ_IIN or READ_IOUT register.
170currX_max Maximum current.
171 From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register.
172currX_lcrit Critical minumum output current.
173 From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
174currX_crit Critical maximum current.
175 From IIN_OC_FAULT_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register.
176currX_alarm Current high alarm.
177 From IIN_OC_WARNING or IOUT_OC_WARNING status.
178currX_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm.
179 From IOUT_UC_FAULT status.
180currX_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm.
181 From IIN_OC_FAULT or IOUT_OC_FAULT status.
182currX_label "iin" or "vinY"
183
184powerX_input Measured power. From READ_PIN or READ_POUT register.
185powerX_cap Output power cap. From POUT_MAX register.
186powerX_max Power limit. From PIN_OP_WARN_LIMIT or
187 POUT_OP_WARN_LIMIT register.
188powerX_crit Critical output power limit.
189 From POUT_OP_FAULT_LIMIT register.
190powerX_alarm Power high alarm.
191 From PIN_OP_WARNING or POUT_OP_WARNING status.
192powerX_crit_alarm Output power critical high alarm.
193 From POUT_OP_FAULT status.
194powerX_label "pin" or "poutY"
195
196tempX_input Measured tempererature.
197 From READ_TEMPERATURE_X register.
198tempX_min Mimimum tempererature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register.
199tempX_max Maximum tempererature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register.
200tempX_lcrit Critical low tempererature.
201 From UT_FAULT_LIMIT register.
202tempX_crit Critical high tempererature.
203 From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register.
204tempX_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. Set by comparing
205 READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_WARN_LIMIT if
206 TEMP_UT_WARNING status is set.
207tempX_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing
208 READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_WARN_LIMIT if
209 TEMP_OT_WARNING status is set.
210tempX_lcrit_alarm Chip temperature critical low alarm. Set by comparing
211 READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_FAULT_LIMIT if
212 TEMP_UT_FAULT status is set.
213tempX_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing
214 READ_TEMPERATURE_X with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if
215 TEMP_OT_FAULT status is set.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627 b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..446a054e4912
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sch5627
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
1Kernel driver sch5627
2=====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * SMSC SCH5627
6 Prefix: 'sch5627'
7 Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space
8 Datasheet: Application Note available upon request
9
10Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
11
12
13Description
14-----------
15
16SMSC SCH5627 Super I/O chips include complete hardware monitoring
17capabilities. They can monitor up to 5 voltages, 4 fans and 8 temperatures.
18
19The hardware monitoring part of the SMSC SCH5627 is accessed by talking
20through an embedded microcontroller. An application note describing the
21protocol for communicating with the microcontroller is available upon
22request. Please mail me if you want a copy.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
index c6559f153589..83a698773ade 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface
@@ -187,6 +187,17 @@ fan[1-*]_div Fan divisor.
187 Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which 187 Note that this is actually an internal clock divisor, which
188 affects the measurable speed range, not the read value. 188 affects the measurable speed range, not the read value.
189 189
190fan[1-*]_pulses Number of tachometer pulses per fan revolution.
191 Integer value, typically between 1 and 4.
192 RW
193 This value is a characteristic of the fan connected to the
194 device's input, so it has to be set in accordance with the fan
195 model.
196 Should only be created if the chip has a register to configure
197 the number of pulses. In the absence of such a register (and
198 thus attribute) the value assumed by all devices is 2 pulses
199 per fan revolution.
200
190fan[1-*]_target 201fan[1-*]_target
191 Desired fan speed 202 Desired fan speed
192 Unit: revolution/min (RPM) 203 Unit: revolution/min (RPM)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf
index 13d556112fc0..76ffef94ed75 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83627ehf
@@ -5,13 +5,11 @@ Supported chips:
5 * Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY) 5 * Winbond W83627EHF/EHG (ISA access ONLY)
6 Prefix: 'w83627ehf' 6 Prefix: 'w83627ehf'
7 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers 7 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
8 Datasheet: 8 Datasheet: not available
9 http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/A6A258F0-F0C9-4F97-81C0-C4D29E7E943E/0/W83627EHF.pdf
10 * Winbond W83627DHG 9 * Winbond W83627DHG
11 Prefix: 'w83627dhg' 10 Prefix: 'w83627dhg'
12 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers 11 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
13 Datasheet: 12 Datasheet: not available
14 http://www.nuvoton.com.tw/NR/rdonlyres/7885623D-A487-4CF9-A47F-30C5F73D6FE6/0/W83627DHG.pdf
15 * Winbond W83627DHG-P 13 * Winbond W83627DHG-P
16 Prefix: 'w83627dhg' 14 Prefix: 'w83627dhg'
17 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers 15 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
@@ -24,6 +22,14 @@ Supported chips:
24 Prefix: 'w83667hg' 22 Prefix: 'w83667hg'
25 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers 23 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
26 Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request 24 Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
25 * Nuvoton NCT6775F/W83667HG-I
26 Prefix: 'nct6775'
27 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
28 Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
29 * Nuvoton NCT6776F
30 Prefix: 'nct6776'
31 Addresses scanned: ISA address retrieved from Super I/O registers
32 Datasheet: Available from Nuvoton upon request
27 33
28Authors: 34Authors:
29 Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> 35 Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
@@ -36,19 +42,28 @@ Description
36----------- 42-----------
37 43
38This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG, 44This driver implements support for the Winbond W83627EHF, W83627EHG,
39W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG and W83667HG-B super I/O chips. 45W83627DHG, W83627DHG-P, W83667HG, W83667HG-B, W83667HG-I (NCT6775F),
40We will refer to them collectively as Winbond chips. 46and NCT6776F super I/O chips. We will refer to them collectively as
41 47Winbond chips.
42The chips implement three temperature sensors, five fan rotation 48
43speed sensors, ten analog voltage sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one 49The chips implement three temperature sensors (up to four for 667HG-B, and nine
44VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms 50for NCT6775F and NCT6776F), five fan rotation speed sensors, ten analog voltage
45with beep warnings (control unimplemented), and some automatic fan 51sensors (only nine for the 627DHG), one VID (6 pins for the 627EHF/EHG, 8 pins
46regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode). 52for the 627DHG and 667HG), alarms with beep warnings (control unimplemented),
53and some automatic fan regulation strategies (plus manual fan control mode).
54
55The temperature sensor sources on W82677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F are
56configurable. temp4 and higher attributes are only reported if its temperature
57source differs from the temperature sources of the already reported temperature
58sensors. The configured source for each of the temperature sensors is provided
59in tempX_label.
47 60
48Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1 61Temperatures are measured in degrees Celsius and measurement resolution is 1
49degC for temp1 and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. An alarm is triggered when 62degC for temp1 and and 0.5 degC for temp2 and temp3. For temp4 and higher,
50the temperature gets higher than high limit; it stays on until the temperature 63resolution is 1 degC for W83667HG-B and 0.0 degC for NCT6775F and NCT6776F.
51falls below the hysteresis value. 64An alarm is triggered when the temperature gets higher than high limit;
65it stays on until the temperature falls below the hysteresis value.
66Alarms are only supported for temp1, temp2, and temp3.
52 67
53Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is 68Fan rotation speeds are reported in RPM (rotations per minute). An alarm is
54triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan 69triggered if the rotation speed has dropped below a programmable limit. Fan
@@ -80,7 +95,8 @@ prog -> pwm4 (not on 667HG and 667HG-B; the programmable setting is not
80 95
81name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG, 96name - this is a standard hwmon device entry. For the W83627EHF and W83627EHG,
82 it is set to "w83627ehf", for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg", 97 it is set to "w83627ehf", for the W83627DHG it is set to "w83627dhg",
83 and for the W83667HG it is set to "w83667hg". 98 for the W83667HG and W83667HG-B it is set to "w83667hg", for NCT6775F it
99 is set to "nct6775", and for NCT6776F it is set to "nct6776".
84 100
85pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range: 101pwm[1-4] - this file stores PWM duty cycle or DC value (fan speed) in range:
86 0 (stop) to 255 (full) 102 0 (stop) to 255 (full)
@@ -90,6 +106,18 @@ pwm[1-4]_enable - this file controls mode of fan/temperature control:
90 * 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode 106 * 2 "Thermal Cruise" mode
91 * 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode 107 * 3 "Fan Speed Cruise" mode
92 * 4 "Smart Fan III" mode 108 * 4 "Smart Fan III" mode
109 * 5 "Smart Fan IV" mode
110
111 SmartFan III mode is not supported on NCT6776F.
112
113 SmartFan IV mode is configurable only if it was configured at system
114 startup, and is only supported for W83677HG-B, NCT6775F, and NCT6776F.
115 SmartFan IV operational parameters can not be configured at this time,
116 and the various pwm attributes are not used in SmartFan IV mode.
117 The attributes can be written to, which is useful if you plan to
118 configure the system for a different pwm mode. However, the information
119 returned when reading pwm attributes is unrelated to SmartFan IV
120 operation.
93 121
94pwm[1-4]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level 122pwm[1-4]_mode - controls if output is PWM or DC level
95 * 0 DC output (0 - 12v) 123 * 0 DC output (0 - 12v)
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83795 b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f160371f463
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83795
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
1Kernel driver w83795
2====================
3
4Supported chips:
5 * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795G
6 Prefix: 'w83795g'
7 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
8 Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
9 * Winbond/Nuvoton W83795ADG
10 Prefix: 'w83795adg'
11 Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c - 0x2f
12 Datasheet: Available for download on nuvoton.com
13
14Authors:
15 Wei Song (Nuvoton)
16 Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
17
18
19Pin mapping
20-----------
21
22Here is a summary of the pin mapping for the W83795G and W83795ADG.
23This can be useful to convert data provided by board manufacturers
24into working libsensors configuration statements.
25
26 W83795G |
27 Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute
28------------------------------------------------------------------
29 13 | VSEN1 (VCORE1) | 10h | in0
30 14 | VSEN2 (VCORE2) | 11h | in1
31 15 | VSEN3 (VCORE3) | 12h | in2
32 16 | VSEN4 | 13h | in3
33 17 | VSEN5 | 14h | in4
34 18 | VSEN6 | 15h | in5
35 19 | VSEN7 | 16h | in6
36 20 | VSEN8 | 17h | in7
37 21 | VSEN9 | 18h | in8
38 22 | VSEN10 | 19h | in9
39 23 | VSEN11 | 1Ah | in10
40 28 | VTT | 1Bh | in11
41 24 | 3VDD | 1Ch | in12
42 25 | 3VSB | 1Dh | in13
43 26 | VBAT | 1Eh | in14
44 3 | VSEN12/TR5 | 1Fh | in15/temp5
45 4 | VSEN13/TR5 | 20h | in16/temp6
46 5/ 6 | VDSEN14/TR1/TD1 | 21h | in17/temp1
47 7/ 8 | VDSEN15/TR2/TD2 | 22h | in18/temp2
48 9/ 10 | VDSEN16/TR3/TD3 | 23h | in19/temp3
49 11/ 12 | VDSEN17/TR4/TD4 | 24h | in20/temp4
50 40 | FANIN1 | 2Eh | fan1
51 42 | FANIN2 | 2Fh | fan2
52 44 | FANIN3 | 30h | fan3
53 46 | FANIN4 | 31h | fan4
54 48 | FANIN5 | 32h | fan5
55 50 | FANIN6 | 33h | fan6
56 52 | FANIN7 | 34h | fan7
57 54 | FANIN8 | 35h | fan8
58 57 | FANIN9 | 36h | fan9
59 58 | FANIN10 | 37h | fan10
60 59 | FANIN11 | 38h | fan11
61 60 | FANIN12 | 39h | fan12
62 31 | FANIN13 | 3Ah | fan13
63 35 | FANIN14 | 3Bh | fan14
64 41 | FANCTL1 | 10h (bank 2) | pwm1
65 43 | FANCTL2 | 11h (bank 2) | pwm2
66 45 | FANCTL3 | 12h (bank 2) | pwm3
67 47 | FANCTL4 | 13h (bank 2) | pwm4
68 49 | FANCTL5 | 14h (bank 2) | pwm5
69 51 | FANCTL6 | 15h (bank 2) | pwm6
70 53 | FANCTL7 | 16h (bank 2) | pwm7
71 55 | FANCTL8 | 17h (bank 2) | pwm8
72 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS1) | 26h | temp7
73 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS2) | 27h | temp8
74 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS3) | 28h | temp9
75 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS4) | 29h | temp10
76 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS5) | 2Ah | temp11
77 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS6) | 2Bh | temp12
78 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS7) | 2Ch | temp13
79 29/ 30 | PECI/TSI (DTS8) | 2Dh | temp14
80 27 | CASEOPEN# | 46h | intrusion0
81
82 W83795ADG |
83 Pin | Name | Register | Sysfs attribute
84------------------------------------------------------------------
85 10 | VSEN1 (VCORE1) | 10h | in0
86 11 | VSEN2 (VCORE2) | 11h | in1
87 12 | VSEN3 (VCORE3) | 12h | in2
88 13 | VSEN4 | 13h | in3
89 14 | VSEN5 | 14h | in4
90 15 | VSEN6 | 15h | in5
91 16 | VSEN7 | 16h | in6
92 17 | VSEN8 | 17h | in7
93 22 | VTT | 1Bh | in11
94 18 | 3VDD | 1Ch | in12
95 19 | 3VSB | 1Dh | in13
96 20 | VBAT | 1Eh | in14
97 48 | VSEN12/TR5 | 1Fh | in15/temp5
98 1 | VSEN13/TR5 | 20h | in16/temp6
99 2/ 3 | VDSEN14/TR1/TD1 | 21h | in17/temp1
100 4/ 5 | VDSEN15/TR2/TD2 | 22h | in18/temp2
101 6/ 7 | VDSEN16/TR3/TD3 | 23h | in19/temp3
102 8/ 9 | VDSEN17/TR4/TD4 | 24h | in20/temp4
103 32 | FANIN1 | 2Eh | fan1
104 34 | FANIN2 | 2Fh | fan2
105 36 | FANIN3 | 30h | fan3
106 37 | FANIN4 | 31h | fan4
107 38 | FANIN5 | 32h | fan5
108 39 | FANIN6 | 33h | fan6
109 40 | FANIN7 | 34h | fan7
110 41 | FANIN8 | 35h | fan8
111 43 | FANIN9 | 36h | fan9
112 44 | FANIN10 | 37h | fan10
113 45 | FANIN11 | 38h | fan11
114 46 | FANIN12 | 39h | fan12
115 24 | FANIN13 | 3Ah | fan13
116 28 | FANIN14 | 3Bh | fan14
117 33 | FANCTL1 | 10h (bank 2) | pwm1
118 35 | FANCTL2 | 11h (bank 2) | pwm2
119 23 | PECI (DTS1) | 26h | temp7
120 23 | PECI (DTS2) | 27h | temp8
121 23 | PECI (DTS3) | 28h | temp9
122 23 | PECI (DTS4) | 29h | temp10
123 23 | PECI (DTS5) | 2Ah | temp11
124 23 | PECI (DTS6) | 2Bh | temp12
125 23 | PECI (DTS7) | 2Ch | temp13
126 23 | PECI (DTS8) | 2Dh | temp14
127 21 | CASEOPEN# | 46h | intrusion0
diff --git a/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7dcd1a4e726c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwspinlock.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
1Hardware Spinlock Framework
2
31. Introduction
4
5Hardware spinlock modules provide hardware assistance for synchronization
6and mutual exclusion between heterogeneous processors and those not operating
7under a single, shared operating system.
8
9For example, OMAP4 has dual Cortex-A9, dual Cortex-M3 and a C64x+ DSP,
10each of which is running a different Operating System (the master, A9,
11is usually running Linux and the slave processors, the M3 and the DSP,
12are running some flavor of RTOS).
13
14A generic hwspinlock framework allows platform-independent drivers to use
15the hwspinlock device in order to access data structures that are shared
16between remote processors, that otherwise have no alternative mechanism
17to accomplish synchronization and mutual exclusion operations.
18
19This is necessary, for example, for Inter-processor communications:
20on OMAP4, cpu-intensive multimedia tasks are offloaded by the host to the
21remote M3 and/or C64x+ slave processors (by an IPC subsystem called Syslink).
22
23To achieve fast message-based communications, a minimal kernel support
24is needed to deliver messages arriving from a remote processor to the
25appropriate user process.
26
27This communication is based on simple data structures that is shared between
28the remote processors, and access to it is synchronized using the hwspinlock
29module (remote processor directly places new messages in this shared data
30structure).
31
32A common hwspinlock interface makes it possible to have generic, platform-
33independent, drivers.
34
352. User API
36
37 struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request(void);
38 - dynamically assign an hwspinlock and return its address, or NULL
39 in case an unused hwspinlock isn't available. Users of this
40 API will usually want to communicate the lock's id to the remote core
41 before it can be used to achieve synchronization.
42 Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but
43 not from within interrupt context.
44
45 struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_request_specific(unsigned int id);
46 - assign a specific hwspinlock id and return its address, or NULL
47 if that hwspinlock is already in use. Usually board code will
48 be calling this function in order to reserve specific hwspinlock
49 ids for predefined purposes.
50 Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but
51 not from within interrupt context.
52
53 int hwspin_lock_free(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
54 - free a previously-assigned hwspinlock; returns 0 on success, or an
55 appropriate error code on failure (e.g. -EINVAL if the hwspinlock
56 is already free).
57 Can be called from an atomic context (this function will not sleep) but
58 not from within interrupt context.
59
60 int hwspin_lock_timeout(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout);
61 - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
62 msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
63 waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
64 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
65 the caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as
66 soon as possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the
67 hardware interconnect.
68 Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
69 notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
70 The function will never sleep.
71
72 int hwspin_lock_timeout_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int timeout);
73 - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
74 msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
75 waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
76 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
77 interrupts are disabled, so the caller must not sleep, and is advised to
78 release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
79 Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
80 notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
81 The function will never sleep.
82
83 int hwspin_lock_timeout_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned int to,
84 unsigned long *flags);
85 - lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock with a timeout limit (specified in
86 msecs). If the hwspinlock is already taken, the function will busy loop
87 waiting for it to be released, but give up when the timeout elapses.
88 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
89 local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved at the
90 given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised to
91 release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
92 Returns 0 when successful and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
93 notably -ETIMEDOUT if the hwspinlock is still busy after timeout msecs).
94 The function will never sleep.
95
96 int hwspin_trylock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
97 - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
98 it is already taken.
99 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled so
100 caller must not sleep, and is advised to release the hwspinlock as soon as
101 possible, in order to minimize remote cores polling on the hardware
102 interconnect.
103 Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
104 notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
105 The function will never sleep.
106
107 int hwspin_trylock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
108 - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
109 it is already taken.
110 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and the local
111 interrupts are disabled so caller must not sleep, and is advised to
112 release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
113 Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
114 notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
115 The function will never sleep.
116
117 int hwspin_trylock_irqsave(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags);
118 - attempt to lock a previously-assigned hwspinlock, but immediately fail if
119 it is already taken.
120 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is disabled,
121 the local interrupts are disabled and their previous state is saved
122 at the given flags placeholder. The caller must not sleep, and is advised
123 to release the hwspinlock as soon as possible.
124 Returns 0 on success and an appropriate error code otherwise (most
125 notably -EBUSY if the hwspinlock was already taken).
126 The function will never sleep.
127
128 void hwspin_unlock(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
129 - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock. Always succeed, and can be called
130 from any context (the function never sleeps). Note: code should _never_
131 unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked (there is no protection
132 against this).
133
134 void hwspin_unlock_irq(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
135 - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock and enable local interrupts.
136 The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
137 Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
138 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption and local
139 interrupts are enabled. This function will never sleep.
140
141 void
142 hwspin_unlock_irqrestore(struct hwspinlock *hwlock, unsigned long *flags);
143 - unlock a previously-locked hwspinlock.
144 The caller should _never_ unlock an hwspinlock which is already unlocked.
145 Doing so is considered a bug (there is no protection against this).
146 Upon a successful return from this function, preemption is reenabled,
147 and the state of the local interrupts is restored to the state saved at
148 the given flags. This function will never sleep.
149
150 int hwspin_lock_get_id(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
151 - retrieve id number of a given hwspinlock. This is needed when an
152 hwspinlock is dynamically assigned: before it can be used to achieve
153 mutual exclusion with a remote cpu, the id number should be communicated
154 to the remote task with which we want to synchronize.
155 Returns the hwspinlock id number, or -EINVAL if hwlock is null.
156
1573. Typical usage
158
159#include <linux/hwspinlock.h>
160#include <linux/err.h>
161
162int hwspinlock_example1(void)
163{
164 struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
165 int ret;
166
167 /* dynamically assign a hwspinlock */
168 hwlock = hwspin_lock_request();
169 if (!hwlock)
170 ...
171
172 id = hwspin_lock_get_id(hwlock);
173 /* probably need to communicate id to a remote processor now */
174
175 /* take the lock, spin for 1 sec if it's already taken */
176 ret = hwspin_lock_timeout(hwlock, 1000);
177 if (ret)
178 ...
179
180 /*
181 * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
182 */
183
184 /* release the lock */
185 hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
186
187 /* free the lock */
188 ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
189 if (ret)
190 ...
191
192 return ret;
193}
194
195int hwspinlock_example2(void)
196{
197 struct hwspinlock *hwlock;
198 int ret;
199
200 /*
201 * assign a specific hwspinlock id - this should be called early
202 * by board init code.
203 */
204 hwlock = hwspin_lock_request_specific(PREDEFINED_LOCK_ID);
205 if (!hwlock)
206 ...
207
208 /* try to take it, but don't spin on it */
209 ret = hwspin_trylock(hwlock);
210 if (!ret) {
211 pr_info("lock is already taken\n");
212 return -EBUSY;
213 }
214
215 /*
216 * we took the lock, do our thing now, but do NOT sleep
217 */
218
219 /* release the lock */
220 hwspin_unlock(hwlock);
221
222 /* free the lock */
223 ret = hwspin_lock_free(hwlock);
224 if (ret)
225 ...
226
227 return ret;
228}
229
230
2314. API for implementors
232
233 int hwspin_lock_register(struct hwspinlock *hwlock);
234 - to be called from the underlying platform-specific implementation, in
235 order to register a new hwspinlock instance. Can be called from an atomic
236 context (this function will not sleep) but not from within interrupt
237 context. Returns 0 on success, or appropriate error code on failure.
238
239 struct hwspinlock *hwspin_lock_unregister(unsigned int id);
240 - to be called from the underlying vendor-specific implementation, in order
241 to unregister an existing (and unused) hwspinlock instance.
242 Can be called from an atomic context (will not sleep) but not from
243 within interrupt context.
244 Returns the address of hwspinlock on success, or NULL on error (e.g.
245 if the hwspinlock is sill in use).
246
2475. struct hwspinlock
248
249This struct represents an hwspinlock instance. It is registered by the
250underlying hwspinlock implementation using the hwspin_lock_register() API.
251
252/**
253 * struct hwspinlock - vendor-specific hwspinlock implementation
254 *
255 * @dev: underlying device, will be used with runtime PM api
256 * @ops: vendor-specific hwspinlock handlers
257 * @id: a global, unique, system-wide, index of the lock.
258 * @lock: initialized and used by hwspinlock core
259 * @owner: underlying implementation module, used to maintain module ref count
260 */
261struct hwspinlock {
262 struct device *dev;
263 const struct hwspinlock_ops *ops;
264 int id;
265 spinlock_t lock;
266 struct module *owner;
267};
268
269The underlying implementation is responsible to assign the dev, ops, id and
270owner members. The lock member, OTOH, is initialized and used by the hwspinlock
271core.
272
2736. Implementation callbacks
274
275There are three possible callbacks defined in 'struct hwspinlock_ops':
276
277struct hwspinlock_ops {
278 int (*trylock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
279 void (*unlock)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
280 void (*relax)(struct hwspinlock *lock);
281};
282
283The first two callbacks are mandatory:
284
285The ->trylock() callback should make a single attempt to take the lock, and
286return 0 on failure and 1 on success. This callback may _not_ sleep.
287
288The ->unlock() callback releases the lock. It always succeed, and it, too,
289may _not_ sleep.
290
291The ->relax() callback is optional. It is called by hwspinlock core while
292spinning on a lock, and can be used by the underlying implementation to force
293a delay between two successive invocations of ->trylock(). It may _not_ sleep.
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..30fe4bb9a069
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-diolan-u2c
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
1Kernel driver i2c-diolan-u2c
2
3Supported adapters:
4 * Diolan U2C-12 I2C-USB adapter
5 Documentation:
6 http://www.diolan.com/i2c/u2c12.html
7
8Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com>
9
10Description
11-----------
12
13This is the driver for the Diolan U2C-12 USB-I2C adapter.
14
15The Diolan U2C-12 I2C-USB Adapter provides a low cost solution to connect
16a computer to I2C slave devices using a USB interface. It also supports
17connectivity to SPI devices.
18
19This driver only supports the I2C interface of U2C-12. The driver does not use
20interrupts.
21
22
23Module parameters
24-----------------
25
26* frequency: I2C bus frequency
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
index 93fe76e56522..6df69765ccb7 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
@@ -16,8 +16,9 @@ Supported adapters:
16 * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai) 16 * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai)
17 * Intel 82801JI (ICH10) 17 * Intel 82801JI (ICH10)
18 * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH) 18 * Intel 5/3400 Series (PCH)
19 * Intel Cougar Point (PCH) 19 * Intel 6 Series (PCH)
20 * Intel Patsburg (PCH) 20 * Intel Patsburg (PCH)
21 * Intel DH89xxCC (PCH)
21 Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website 22 Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
22 23
23On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller 24On Intel Patsburg and later chipsets, both the normal host SMBus controller
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
index 87da405a8597..9edb75d8c9b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ static int __devinit usb_hcd_pnx4008_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
100 (...) 100 (...)
101 i2c_adap = i2c_get_adapter(2); 101 i2c_adap = i2c_get_adapter(2);
102 memset(&i2c_info, 0, sizeof(struct i2c_board_info)); 102 memset(&i2c_info, 0, sizeof(struct i2c_board_info));
103 strlcpy(i2c_info.name, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE); 103 strlcpy(i2c_info.type, "isp1301_pnx", I2C_NAME_SIZE);
104 isp1301_i2c_client = i2c_new_probed_device(i2c_adap, &i2c_info, 104 isp1301_i2c_client = i2c_new_probed_device(i2c_adap, &i2c_info,
105 normal_i2c, NULL); 105 normal_i2c, NULL);
106 i2c_put_adapter(i2c_adap); 106 i2c_put_adapter(i2c_adap);
diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
index 9a45f9bb6a25..d6991625c407 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/upgrading-clients
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ static int example_attach(struct i2c_adapter *adap, int addr, int kind)
61 return 0; 61 return 0;
62} 62}
63 63
64static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) 64static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
65{ 65{
66 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); 66 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
67 67
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
81 .name = "example", 81 .name = "example",
82 }, 82 },
83 .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, 83 .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
84 .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), 84 .detach_client = example_detach,
85 .suspend = example_suspend, 85 .suspend = example_suspend,
86 .resume = example_resume, 86 .resume = example_resume,
87}; 87};
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Updating the client
93The new style binding model will check against a list of supported 93The new style binding model will check against a list of supported
94devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering 94devices and their associated address supplied by the code registering
95the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and 95the busses. This means that the driver .attach_adapter and
96.detach_adapter methods can be removed, along with the addr_data, 96.detach_client methods can be removed, along with the addr_data,
97as follows: 97as follows:
98 98
99- static struct i2c_driver example_driver; 99- static struct i2c_driver example_driver;
@@ -110,14 +110,14 @@ as follows:
110 110
111 static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { 111 static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
112- .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter, 112- .attach_adapter = example_attach_adapter,
113- .detach_client = __devexit_p(example_detach), 113- .detach_client = example_detach,
114 } 114 }
115 115
116Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so: 116Add the probe and remove methods to the i2c_driver, as so:
117 117
118 static struct i2c_driver example_driver = { 118 static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
119+ .probe = example_probe, 119+ .probe = example_probe,
120+ .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), 120+ .remove = example_remove,
121 } 121 }
122 122
123Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters 123Change the example_attach method to accept the new parameters
@@ -199,8 +199,8 @@ to delete the i2c_detach_client call. It is possible that you
199can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for 199can also remove the ret variable as it is not not needed for
200any of the core functions. 200any of the core functions.
201 201
202- static int __devexit example_detach(struct i2c_client *client) 202- static int example_detach(struct i2c_client *client)
203+ static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) 203+ static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
204{ 204{
205 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); 205 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
206 206
@@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ static int example_probe(struct i2c_client *client,
253 return 0; 253 return 0;
254} 254}
255 255
256static int __devexit example_remove(struct i2c_client *client) 256static int example_remove(struct i2c_client *client)
257{ 257{
258 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client); 258 struct example_state *state = i2c_get_clientdata(client);
259 259
@@ -275,7 +275,7 @@ static struct i2c_driver example_driver = {
275 }, 275 },
276 .id_table = example_idtable, 276 .id_table = example_idtable,
277 .probe = example_probe, 277 .probe = example_probe,
278 .remove = __devexit_p(example_remove), 278 .remove = example_remove,
279 .suspend = example_suspend, 279 .suspend = example_suspend,
280 .resume = example_resume, 280 .resume = example_resume,
281}; 281};
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
index ac293e955308..e68543f767d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -133,6 +133,7 @@ Code Seq#(hex) Include File Comments
133'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/hidp/hidp.h conflict! 133'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/hidp/hidp.h conflict!
134'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h conflict! 134'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/cmtp/cmtp.h conflict!
135'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/bnep/bnep.h conflict! 135'H' C0-DF net/bluetooth/bnep/bnep.h conflict!
136'H' F1 linux/hid-roccat.h <mailto:erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net>
136'I' all linux/isdn.h conflict! 137'I' all linux/isdn.h conflict!
137'I' 00-0F drivers/isdn/divert/isdn_divert.h conflict! 138'I' 00-0F drivers/isdn/divert/isdn_divert.h conflict!
138'I' 40-4F linux/mISDNif.h conflict! 139'I' 40-4F linux/mISDNif.h conflict!
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
index 4a990317b84a..f1431d099fce 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ INSTALL_MOD_STRIP
146INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be 146INSTALL_MOD_STRIP, if defined, will cause modules to be
147stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then 147stripped after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then
148the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, 148the default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise,
149INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the options to the strip command. 149INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the options to the strip command.
150 150
151INSTALL_FW_PATH 151INSTALL_FW_PATH
152-------------------------------------------------- 152--------------------------------------------------
@@ -196,3 +196,8 @@ to be included in the databases, separated by blank space. E.g.:
196To get all available archs you can also specify all. E.g.: 196To get all available archs you can also specify all. E.g.:
197 197
198 $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS=all tags 198 $ make ALLSOURCE_ARCHS=all tags
199
200KBUILD_ENABLE_EXTRA_GCC_CHECKS
201--------------------------------------------------
202If enabled over the make command line with "W=1", it turns on additional
203gcc -W... options for more extensive build-time checking.
diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
index 86e3cd0d26a0..5d145bb443c0 100644
--- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.txt
@@ -1325,7 +1325,8 @@ The top Makefile exports the following variables:
1325 If this variable is specified, will cause modules to be stripped 1325 If this variable is specified, will cause modules to be stripped
1326 after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the 1326 after they are installed. If INSTALL_MOD_STRIP is '1', then the
1327 default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise, 1327 default option --strip-debug will be used. Otherwise,
1328 INSTALL_MOD_STRIP will used as the option(s) to the strip command. 1328 INSTALL_MOD_STRIP value will be used as the option(s) to the strip
1329 command.
1329 1330
1330 1331
1331=== 9 Makefile language 1332=== 9 Makefile language
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index f4a04c0c7edc..c357a31411cd 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -626,6 +626,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
626 disable= [IPV6] 626 disable= [IPV6]
627 See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. 627 See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt.
628 628
629 disable_ddw [PPC/PSERIES]
630 Disable Dynamic DMA Window support. Use this if
631 to workaround buggy firmware.
632
629 disable_ipv6= [IPV6] 633 disable_ipv6= [IPV6]
630 See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt. 634 See Documentation/networking/ipv6.txt.
631 635
@@ -868,6 +872,12 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
868 If specified, z/VM IUCV HVC accepts connections 872 If specified, z/VM IUCV HVC accepts connections
869 from listed z/VM user IDs only. 873 from listed z/VM user IDs only.
870 874
875 keep_bootcon [KNL]
876 Do not unregister boot console at start. This is only
877 useful for debugging when something happens in the window
878 between unregistering the boot console and initializing
879 the real console.
880
871 i2c_bus= [HW] Override the default board specific I2C bus speed 881 i2c_bus= [HW] Override the default board specific I2C bus speed
872 or register an additional I2C bus that is not 882 or register an additional I2C bus that is not
873 registered from board initialization code. 883 registered from board initialization code.
@@ -1580,16 +1590,25 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
1580 of returning the full 64-bit number. 1590 of returning the full 64-bit number.
1581 The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers. 1591 The default is to return 64-bit inode numbers.
1582 1592
1593 nfs.nfs4_disable_idmapping=
1594 [NFSv4] When set, this option disables the NFSv4
1595 idmapper on the client, but only if the mount
1596 is using the 'sec=sys' security flavour. This may
1597 make migration from legacy NFSv2/v3 systems easier
1598 provided that the server has the appropriate support.
1599 The default is to always enable NFSv4 idmapping.
1600
1583 nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take 1601 nmi_debug= [KNL,AVR32,SH] Specify one or more actions to take
1584 when a NMI is triggered. 1602 when a NMI is triggered.
1585 Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die] 1603 Format: [state][,regs][,debounce][,die]
1586 1604
1587 nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels 1605 nmi_watchdog= [KNL,BUGS=X86] Debugging features for SMP kernels
1588 Format: [panic,][num] 1606 Format: [panic,][nopanic,][num]
1589 Valid num: 0 1607 Valid num: 0
1590 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off 1608 0 - turn nmi_watchdog off
1591 When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog 1609 When panic is specified, panic when an NMI watchdog
1592 timeout occurs. 1610 timeout occurs (or 'nopanic' to override the opposite
1611 default).
1593 This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and 1612 This is useful when you use a panic=... timeout and
1594 need the box quickly up again. 1613 need the box quickly up again.
1595 1614
@@ -1813,6 +1832,11 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
1813 perfmon on Intel CPUs instead of the 1832 perfmon on Intel CPUs instead of the
1814 CPU specific event set. 1833 CPU specific event set.
1815 1834
1835 oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process,
1836 but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine.
1837 This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions.
1838 Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot.
1839
1816 OSS [HW,OSS] 1840 OSS [HW,OSS]
1817 See Documentation/sound/oss/oss-parameters.txt 1841 See Documentation/sound/oss/oss-parameters.txt
1818 1842
@@ -2444,6 +2468,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted.
2444 <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency 2468 <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency
2445 0: no polling (default) 2469 0: no polling (default)
2446 2470
2471 threadirqs [KNL]
2472 Force threading of all interrupt handlers except those
2473 marked explicitely IRQF_NO_THREAD.
2474
2447 topology= [S390] 2475 topology= [S390]
2448 Format: {off | on} 2476 Format: {off | on}
2449 Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu 2477 Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu
diff --git a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt
index 09b55e461740..69686ad12c66 100644
--- a/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt
+++ b/Documentation/keys-request-key.txt
@@ -127,14 +127,15 @@ This is because process A's keyrings can't simply be attached to
127of them, and (b) it requires the same UID/GID/Groups all the way through. 127of them, and (b) it requires the same UID/GID/Groups all the way through.
128 128
129 129
130====================== 130====================================
131NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION 131NEGATIVE INSTANTIATION AND REJECTION
132====================== 132====================================
133 133
134Rather than instantiating a key, it is possible for the possessor of an 134Rather than instantiating a key, it is possible for the possessor of an
135authorisation key to negatively instantiate a key that's under construction. 135authorisation key to negatively instantiate a key that's under construction.
136This is a short duration placeholder that causes any attempt at re-requesting 136This is a short duration placeholder that causes any attempt at re-requesting
137the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY. 137the key whilst it exists to fail with error ENOKEY if negated or the specified
138error if rejected.
138 139
139This is provided to prevent excessive repeated spawning of /sbin/request-key 140This is provided to prevent excessive repeated spawning of /sbin/request-key
140processes for a key that will never be obtainable. 141processes for a key that will never be obtainable.
diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt
index e4dbbdb1bd96..6523a9e6f293 100644
--- a/Documentation/keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/keys.txt
@@ -637,6 +637,9 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
637 long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, key_serial_t key, 637 long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, key_serial_t key,
638 const void *payload, size_t plen, 638 const void *payload, size_t plen,
639 key_serial_t keyring); 639 key_serial_t keyring);
640 long keyctl(KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, key_serial_t key,
641 const struct iovec *payload_iov, unsigned ioc,
642 key_serial_t keyring);
640 643
641 If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a 644 If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a
642 key, userspace should use this call to supply data for the key before the 645 key, userspace should use this call to supply data for the key before the
@@ -652,11 +655,16 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
652 655
653 The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key(). 656 The payload and plen arguments describe the payload data as for add_key().
654 657
658 The payload_iov and ioc arguments describe the payload data in an iovec
659 array instead of a single buffer.
660
655 661
656 (*) Negatively instantiate a partially constructed key. 662 (*) Negatively instantiate a partially constructed key.
657 663
658 long keyctl(KEYCTL_NEGATE, key_serial_t key, 664 long keyctl(KEYCTL_NEGATE, key_serial_t key,
659 unsigned timeout, key_serial_t keyring); 665 unsigned timeout, key_serial_t keyring);
666 long keyctl(KEYCTL_REJECT, key_serial_t key,
667 unsigned timeout, unsigned error, key_serial_t keyring);
660 668
661 If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a 669 If the kernel calls back to userspace to complete the instantiation of a
662 key, userspace should use this call mark the key as negative before the 670 key, userspace should use this call mark the key as negative before the
@@ -669,6 +677,10 @@ The keyctl syscall functions are:
669 that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in 677 that keyring, however all the constraints applying in KEYCTL_LINK apply in
670 this case too. 678 this case too.
671 679
680 If the key is rejected, future searches for it will return the specified
681 error code until the rejected key expires. Negating the key is the same
682 as rejecting the key with ENOKEY as the error code.
683
672 684
673 (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring. 685 (*) Set the default request-key destination keyring.
674 686
@@ -1062,6 +1074,13 @@ The structure has a number of fields, some of which are mandatory:
1062 viable. 1074 viable.
1063 1075
1064 1076
1077 (*) int (*vet_description)(const char *description);
1078
1079 This optional method is called to vet a key description. If the key type
1080 doesn't approve of the key description, it may return an error, otherwise
1081 it should return 0.
1082
1083
1065 (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen); 1084 (*) int (*instantiate)(struct key *key, const void *data, size_t datalen);
1066 1085
1067 This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction. 1086 This method is called to attach a payload to a key during construction.
@@ -1231,10 +1250,11 @@ hand the request off to (perhaps a path held in placed in another key by, for
1231example, the KDE desktop manager). 1250example, the KDE desktop manager).
1232 1251
1233The program (or whatever it calls) should finish construction of the key by 1252The program (or whatever it calls) should finish construction of the key by
1234calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE, which also permits it to cache the key in one of 1253calling KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE or KEYCTL_INSTANTIATE_IOV, which also permits it to
1235the keyrings (probably the session ring) before returning. Alternatively, the 1254cache the key in one of the keyrings (probably the session ring) before
1236key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE; this also permits the key to 1255returning. Alternatively, the key can be marked as negative with KEYCTL_NEGATE
1237be cached in one of the keyrings. 1256or KEYCTL_REJECT; this also permits the key to be cached in one of the
1257keyrings.
1238 1258
1239If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will 1259If it returns with the key remaining in the unconstructed state, the key will
1240be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an 1260be marked as being negative, it will be added to the session keyring, and an
diff --git a/Documentation/kref.txt b/Documentation/kref.txt
index ae203f91ee9b..48ba715d5a63 100644
--- a/Documentation/kref.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kref.txt
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ static struct my_data *get_entry()
156 struct my_data *entry = NULL; 156 struct my_data *entry = NULL;
157 mutex_lock(&mutex); 157 mutex_lock(&mutex);
158 if (!list_empty(&q)) { 158 if (!list_empty(&q)) {
159 entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_q_entry, link); 159 entry = container_of(q.next, struct my_data, link);
160 kref_get(&entry->refcount); 160 kref_get(&entry->refcount);
161 } 161 }
162 mutex_unlock(&mutex); 162 mutex_unlock(&mutex);
diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
index ad85797c1cf0..9bef4e4cec50 100644
--- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
166 166
167This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. 167This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed.
168 168
1694.6 KVM_CREATE_VCPU 1694.7 KVM_CREATE_VCPU
170 170
171Capability: basic 171Capability: basic
172Architectures: all 172Architectures: all
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ Returns: vcpu fd on success, -1 on error
177This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer 177This API adds a vcpu to a virtual machine. The vcpu id is a small integer
178in the range [0, max_vcpus). 178in the range [0, max_vcpus).
179 179
1804.7 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl) 1804.8 KVM_GET_DIRTY_LOG (vm ioctl)
181 181
182Capability: basic 182Capability: basic
183Architectures: x86 183Architectures: x86
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ since the last call to this ioctl. Bit 0 is the first page in the
200memory slot. Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding 200memory slot. Ensure the entire structure is cleared to avoid padding
201issues. 201issues.
202 202
2034.8 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS 2034.9 KVM_SET_MEMORY_ALIAS
204 204
205Capability: basic 205Capability: basic
206Architectures: x86 206Architectures: x86
@@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ Returns: 0 (success), -1 (error)
210 210
211This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed. 211This ioctl is obsolete and has been removed.
212 212
2134.9 KVM_RUN 2134.10 KVM_RUN
214 214
215Capability: basic 215Capability: basic
216Architectures: all 216Architectures: all
@@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ obtained by mmap()ing the vcpu fd at offset 0, with the size given by
226KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE. The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct 226KVM_GET_VCPU_MMAP_SIZE. The parameter block is formatted as a 'struct
227kvm_run' (see below). 227kvm_run' (see below).
228 228
2294.10 KVM_GET_REGS 2294.11 KVM_GET_REGS
230 230
231Capability: basic 231Capability: basic
232Architectures: all 232Architectures: all
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ struct kvm_regs {
246 __u64 rip, rflags; 246 __u64 rip, rflags;
247}; 247};
248 248
2494.11 KVM_SET_REGS 2494.12 KVM_SET_REGS
250 250
251Capability: basic 251Capability: basic
252Architectures: all 252Architectures: all
@@ -258,7 +258,7 @@ Writes the general purpose registers into the vcpu.
258 258
259See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure. 259See KVM_GET_REGS for the data structure.
260 260
2614.12 KVM_GET_SREGS 2614.13 KVM_GET_SREGS
262 262
263Capability: basic 263Capability: basic
264Architectures: x86 264Architectures: x86
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ interrupt_bitmap is a bitmap of pending external interrupts. At most
283one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC 283one bit may be set. This interrupt has been acknowledged by the APIC
284but not yet injected into the cpu core. 284but not yet injected into the cpu core.
285 285
2864.13 KVM_SET_SREGS 2864.14 KVM_SET_SREGS
287 287
288Capability: basic 288Capability: basic
289Architectures: x86 289Architectures: x86
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
294Writes special registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_SREGS for the 294Writes special registers into the vcpu. See KVM_GET_SREGS for the
295data structures. 295data structures.
296 296
2974.14 KVM_TRANSLATE 2974.15 KVM_TRANSLATE
298 298
299Capability: basic 299Capability: basic
300Architectures: x86 300Architectures: x86
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ struct kvm_translation {
317 __u8 pad[5]; 317 __u8 pad[5];
318}; 318};
319 319
3204.15 KVM_INTERRUPT 3204.16 KVM_INTERRUPT
321 321
322Capability: basic 322Capability: basic
323Architectures: x86, ppc 323Architectures: x86, ppc
@@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ c) KVM_INTERRUPT_SET_LEVEL
365Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid 365Note that any value for 'irq' other than the ones stated above is invalid
366and incurs unexpected behavior. 366and incurs unexpected behavior.
367 367
3684.16 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST 3684.17 KVM_DEBUG_GUEST
369 369
370Capability: basic 370Capability: basic
371Architectures: none 371Architectures: none
@@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ Returns: -1 on error
375 375
376Support for this has been removed. Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead. 376Support for this has been removed. Use KVM_SET_GUEST_DEBUG instead.
377 377
3784.17 KVM_GET_MSRS 3784.18 KVM_GET_MSRS
379 379
380Capability: basic 380Capability: basic
381Architectures: x86 381Architectures: x86
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the
403size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry. 403size of the entries array) and the 'index' member of each array entry.
404kvm will fill in the 'data' member. 404kvm will fill in the 'data' member.
405 405
4064.18 KVM_SET_MSRS 4064.19 KVM_SET_MSRS
407 407
408Capability: basic 408Capability: basic
409Architectures: x86 409Architectures: x86
@@ -418,7 +418,7 @@ Application code should set the 'nmsrs' member (which indicates the
418size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each 418size of the entries array), and the 'index' and 'data' members of each
419array entry. 419array entry.
420 420
4214.19 KVM_SET_CPUID 4214.20 KVM_SET_CPUID
422 422
423Capability: basic 423Capability: basic
424Architectures: x86 424Architectures: x86
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ struct kvm_cpuid {
446 struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0]; 446 struct kvm_cpuid_entry entries[0];
447}; 447};
448 448
4494.20 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK 4494.21 KVM_SET_SIGNAL_MASK
450 450
451Capability: basic 451Capability: basic
452Architectures: x86 452Architectures: x86
@@ -468,7 +468,7 @@ struct kvm_signal_mask {
468 __u8 sigset[0]; 468 __u8 sigset[0];
469}; 469};
470 470
4714.21 KVM_GET_FPU 4714.22 KVM_GET_FPU
472 472
473Capability: basic 473Capability: basic
474Architectures: x86 474Architectures: x86
@@ -493,7 +493,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu {
493 __u32 pad2; 493 __u32 pad2;
494}; 494};
495 495
4964.22 KVM_SET_FPU 4964.23 KVM_SET_FPU
497 497
498Capability: basic 498Capability: basic
499Architectures: x86 499Architectures: x86
@@ -518,7 +518,7 @@ struct kvm_fpu {
518 __u32 pad2; 518 __u32 pad2;
519}; 519};
520 520
5214.23 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP 5214.24 KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP
522 522
523Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP 523Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
524Architectures: x86, ia64 524Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -531,7 +531,7 @@ ioapic, a virtual PIC (two PICs, nested), and sets up future vcpus to have a
531local APIC. IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23 531local APIC. IRQ routing for GSIs 0-15 is set to both PIC and IOAPIC; GSI 16-23
532only go to the IOAPIC. On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created. 532only go to the IOAPIC. On ia64, a IOSAPIC is created.
533 533
5344.24 KVM_IRQ_LINE 5344.25 KVM_IRQ_LINE
535 535
536Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP 536Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
537Architectures: x86, ia64 537Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_level {
552 __u32 level; /* 0 or 1 */ 552 __u32 level; /* 0 or 1 */
553}; 553};
554 554
5554.25 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP 5554.26 KVM_GET_IRQCHIP
556 556
557Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP 557Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
558Architectures: x86, ia64 558Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -573,7 +573,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip {
573 } chip; 573 } chip;
574}; 574};
575 575
5764.26 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP 5764.27 KVM_SET_IRQCHIP
577 577
578Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP 578Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQCHIP
579Architectures: x86, ia64 579Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -594,7 +594,7 @@ struct kvm_irqchip {
594 } chip; 594 } chip;
595}; 595};
596 596
5974.27 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG 5974.28 KVM_XEN_HVM_CONFIG
598 598
599Capability: KVM_CAP_XEN_HVM 599Capability: KVM_CAP_XEN_HVM
600Architectures: x86 600Architectures: x86
@@ -618,7 +618,7 @@ struct kvm_xen_hvm_config {
618 __u8 pad2[30]; 618 __u8 pad2[30];
619}; 619};
620 620
6214.27 KVM_GET_CLOCK 6214.29 KVM_GET_CLOCK
622 622
623Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK 623Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK
624Architectures: x86 624Architectures: x86
@@ -636,7 +636,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
636 __u32 pad[9]; 636 __u32 pad[9];
637}; 637};
638 638
6394.28 KVM_SET_CLOCK 6394.30 KVM_SET_CLOCK
640 640
641Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK 641Capability: KVM_CAP_ADJUST_CLOCK
642Architectures: x86 642Architectures: x86
@@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ struct kvm_clock_data {
654 __u32 pad[9]; 654 __u32 pad[9];
655}; 655};
656 656
6574.29 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS 6574.31 KVM_GET_VCPU_EVENTS
658 658
659Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS 659Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
660Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW 660Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
@@ -693,7 +693,7 @@ struct kvm_vcpu_events {
693KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that 693KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW may be set in the flags field to signal that
694interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined. 694interrupt.shadow contains a valid state. Otherwise, this field is undefined.
695 695
6964.30 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS 6964.32 KVM_SET_VCPU_EVENTS
697 697
698Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS 698Capability: KVM_CAP_VCPU_EVENTS
699Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW 699Extended by: KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW
@@ -719,7 +719,7 @@ If KVM_CAP_INTR_SHADOW is available, KVM_VCPUEVENT_VALID_SHADOW can be set in
719the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and 719the flags field to signal that interrupt.shadow contains a valid state and
720shall be written into the VCPU. 720shall be written into the VCPU.
721 721
7224.32 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS 7224.33 KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS
723 723
724Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS 724Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
725Architectures: x86 725Architectures: x86
@@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ struct kvm_debugregs {
737 __u64 reserved[9]; 737 __u64 reserved[9];
738}; 738};
739 739
7404.33 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS 7404.34 KVM_SET_DEBUGREGS
741 741
742Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS 742Capability: KVM_CAP_DEBUGREGS
743Architectures: x86 743Architectures: x86
@@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ Writes debug registers into the vcpu.
750See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused 750See KVM_GET_DEBUGREGS for the data structure. The flags field is unused
751yet and must be cleared on entry. 751yet and must be cleared on entry.
752 752
7534.34 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION 7534.35 KVM_SET_USER_MEMORY_REGION
754 754
755Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM 755Capability: KVM_CAP_USER_MEM
756Architectures: all 756Architectures: all
@@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ It is recommended to use this API instead of the KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION ioctl.
796The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory 796The KVM_SET_MEMORY_REGION does not allow fine grained control over memory
797allocation and is deprecated. 797allocation and is deprecated.
798 798
7994.35 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR 7994.36 KVM_SET_TSS_ADDR
800 800
801Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR 801Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_TSS_ADDR
802Architectures: x86 802Architectures: x86
@@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware
814because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals 814because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
815documentation when it pops into existence). 815documentation when it pops into existence).
816 816
8174.36 KVM_ENABLE_CAP 8174.37 KVM_ENABLE_CAP
818 818
819Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP 819Capability: KVM_CAP_ENABLE_CAP
820Architectures: ppc 820Architectures: ppc
@@ -849,7 +849,7 @@ function properly, this is the place to put them.
849 __u8 pad[64]; 849 __u8 pad[64];
850}; 850};
851 851
8524.37 KVM_GET_MP_STATE 8524.38 KVM_GET_MP_STATE
853 853
854Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE 854Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
855Architectures: x86, ia64 855Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -879,7 +879,7 @@ Possible values are:
879This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel 879This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel
880irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. 880irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
881 881
8824.38 KVM_SET_MP_STATE 8824.39 KVM_SET_MP_STATE
883 883
884Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE 884Capability: KVM_CAP_MP_STATE
885Architectures: x86, ia64 885Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ arguments.
893This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel 893This ioctl is only useful after KVM_CREATE_IRQCHIP. Without an in-kernel
894irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace. 894irqchip, the multiprocessing state must be maintained by userspace.
895 895
8964.39 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR 8964.40 KVM_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR
897 897
898Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR 898Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_IDENTITY_MAP_ADDR
899Architectures: x86 899Architectures: x86
@@ -911,7 +911,7 @@ This ioctl is required on Intel-based hosts. This is needed on Intel hardware
911because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals 911because of a quirk in the virtualization implementation (see the internals
912documentation when it pops into existence). 912documentation when it pops into existence).
913 913
9144.40 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID 9144.41 KVM_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID
915 915
916Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID 916Capability: KVM_CAP_SET_BOOT_CPU_ID
917Architectures: x86, ia64 917Architectures: x86, ia64
@@ -923,7 +923,7 @@ Define which vcpu is the Bootstrap Processor (BSP). Values are the same
923as the vcpu id in KVM_CREATE_VCPU. If this ioctl is not called, the default 923as the vcpu id in KVM_CREATE_VCPU. If this ioctl is not called, the default
924is vcpu 0. 924is vcpu 0.
925 925
9264.41 KVM_GET_XSAVE 9264.42 KVM_GET_XSAVE
927 927
928Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE 928Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE
929Architectures: x86 929Architectures: x86
@@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave {
937 937
938This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xsave struct to the userspace. 938This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xsave struct to the userspace.
939 939
9404.42 KVM_SET_XSAVE 9404.43 KVM_SET_XSAVE
941 941
942Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE 942Capability: KVM_CAP_XSAVE
943Architectures: x86 943Architectures: x86
@@ -951,7 +951,7 @@ struct kvm_xsave {
951 951
952This ioctl would copy userspace's xsave struct to the kernel. 952This ioctl would copy userspace's xsave struct to the kernel.
953 953
9544.43 KVM_GET_XCRS 9544.44 KVM_GET_XCRS
955 955
956Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS 956Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS
957Architectures: x86 957Architectures: x86
@@ -974,7 +974,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs {
974 974
975This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xcrs to the userspace. 975This ioctl would copy current vcpu's xcrs to the userspace.
976 976
9774.44 KVM_SET_XCRS 9774.45 KVM_SET_XCRS
978 978
979Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS 979Capability: KVM_CAP_XCRS
980Architectures: x86 980Architectures: x86
@@ -997,7 +997,7 @@ struct kvm_xcrs {
997 997
998This ioctl would set vcpu's xcr to the value userspace specified. 998This ioctl would set vcpu's xcr to the value userspace specified.
999 999
10004.45 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID 10004.46 KVM_GET_SUPPORTED_CPUID
1001 1001
1002Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_CPUID 1002Capability: KVM_CAP_EXT_CPUID
1003Architectures: x86 1003Architectures: x86
@@ -1062,7 +1062,7 @@ emulate them efficiently. The fields in each entry are defined as follows:
1062 eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for 1062 eax, ebx, ecx, edx: the values returned by the cpuid instruction for
1063 this function/index combination 1063 this function/index combination
1064 1064
10654.46 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO 10654.47 KVM_PPC_GET_PVINFO
1066 1066
1067Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO 1067Capability: KVM_CAP_PPC_GET_PVINFO
1068Architectures: ppc 1068Architectures: ppc
@@ -1085,7 +1085,7 @@ of 4 instructions that make up a hypercall.
1085If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that 1085If any additional field gets added to this structure later on, a bit for that
1086additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap. 1086additional piece of information will be set in the flags bitmap.
1087 1087
10884.47 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE 10884.48 KVM_ASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE
1089 1089
1090Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT 1090Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT
1091Architectures: x86 ia64 1091Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1113,7 +1113,7 @@ following flags are specified:
1113/* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */ 1113/* Depends on KVM_CAP_IOMMU */
1114#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU (1 << 0) 1114#define KVM_DEV_ASSIGN_ENABLE_IOMMU (1 << 0)
1115 1115
11164.48 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE 11164.49 KVM_DEASSIGN_PCI_DEVICE
1117 1117
1118Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT 1118Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_DEASSIGNMENT
1119Architectures: x86 ia64 1119Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1126,7 +1126,7 @@ Ends PCI device assignment, releasing all associated resources.
1126See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is 1126See KVM_CAP_DEVICE_ASSIGNMENT for the data structure. Only assigned_dev_id is
1127used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device. 1127used in kvm_assigned_pci_dev to identify the device.
1128 1128
11294.49 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ 11294.50 KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
1130 1130
1131Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ 1131Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
1132Architectures: x86 ia64 1132Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1164,7 +1164,7 @@ The following flags are defined:
1164It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the 1164It is not valid to specify multiple types per host or guest IRQ. However, the
1165IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null. 1165IRQ type of host and guest can differ or can even be null.
1166 1166
11674.50 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ 11674.51 KVM_DEASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
1168 1168
1169Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ 1169Capability: KVM_CAP_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ
1170Architectures: x86 ia64 1170Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1178,7 +1178,7 @@ See KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ for the data structure. The target device is specified
1178by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on 1178by assigned_dev_id, flags must correspond to the IRQ type specified on
1179KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed. 1179KVM_ASSIGN_DEV_IRQ. Partial deassignment of host or guest IRQ is allowed.
1180 1180
11814.51 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING 11814.52 KVM_SET_GSI_ROUTING
1182 1182
1183Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING 1183Capability: KVM_CAP_IRQ_ROUTING
1184Architectures: x86 ia64 1184Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1226,7 +1226,7 @@ struct kvm_irq_routing_msi {
1226 __u32 pad; 1226 __u32 pad;
1227}; 1227};
1228 1228
12294.52 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR 12294.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_NR
1230 1230
1231Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX 1231Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX
1232Architectures: x86 ia64 1232Architectures: x86 ia64
@@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ struct kvm_assigned_msix_nr {
1245 1245
1246#define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV 256 1246#define KVM_MAX_MSIX_PER_DEV 256
1247 1247
12484.53 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY 12484.54 KVM_ASSIGN_SET_MSIX_ENTRY
1249 1249
1250Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX 1250Capability: KVM_CAP_DEVICE_MSIX
1251Architectures: x86 ia64 1251Architectures: x86 ia64
diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3b4cd3bf5631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
1KVM Lock Overview
2=================
3
41. Acquisition Orders
5---------------------
6
7(to be written)
8
92. Reference
10------------
11
12Name: kvm_lock
13Type: raw_spinlock
14Arch: any
15Protects: - vm_list
16 - hardware virtualization enable/disable
17Comment: 'raw' because hardware enabling/disabling must be atomic /wrt
18 migration.
19
20Name: kvm_arch::tsc_write_lock
21Type: raw_spinlock
22Arch: x86
23Protects: - kvm_arch::{last_tsc_write,last_tsc_nsec,last_tsc_offset}
24 - tsc offset in vmcb
25Comment: 'raw' because updating the tsc offsets must not be preempted.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/hpfall.c b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c
index a4a8fc5d05d4..a4a8fc5d05d4 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/hpfall.c
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/hpfall.c
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
index 631ad2f1b229..f0d3a8026a56 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-barriers.txt
@@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Contents:
21 - SMP barrier pairing. 21 - SMP barrier pairing.
22 - Examples of memory barrier sequences. 22 - Examples of memory barrier sequences.
23 - Read memory barriers vs load speculation. 23 - Read memory barriers vs load speculation.
24 - Transitivity
24 25
25 (*) Explicit kernel barriers. 26 (*) Explicit kernel barriers.
26 27
@@ -959,6 +960,63 @@ the speculation will be cancelled and the value reloaded:
959 retrieved : : +-------+ 960 retrieved : : +-------+
960 961
961 962
963TRANSITIVITY
964------------
965
966Transitivity is a deeply intuitive notion about ordering that is not
967always provided by real computer systems. The following example
968demonstrates transitivity (also called "cumulativity"):
969
970 CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3
971 ======================= ======================= =======================
972 { X = 0, Y = 0 }
973 STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1
974 <general barrier> <general barrier>
975 LOAD Y LOAD X
976
977Suppose that CPU 2's load from X returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0.
978This indicates that CPU 2's load from X in some sense follows CPU 1's
979store to X and that CPU 2's load from Y in some sense preceded CPU 3's
980store to Y. The question is then "Can CPU 3's load from X return 0?"
981
982Because CPU 2's load from X in some sense came after CPU 1's store, it
983is natural to expect that CPU 3's load from X must therefore return 1.
984This expectation is an example of transitivity: if a load executing on
985CPU A follows a load from the same variable executing on CPU B, then
986CPU A's load must either return the same value that CPU B's load did,
987or must return some later value.
988
989In the Linux kernel, use of general memory barriers guarantees
990transitivity. Therefore, in the above example, if CPU 2's load from X
991returns 1 and its load from Y returns 0, then CPU 3's load from X must
992also return 1.
993
994However, transitivity is -not- guaranteed for read or write barriers.
995For example, suppose that CPU 2's general barrier in the above example
996is changed to a read barrier as shown below:
997
998 CPU 1 CPU 2 CPU 3
999 ======================= ======================= =======================
1000 { X = 0, Y = 0 }
1001 STORE X=1 LOAD X STORE Y=1
1002 <read barrier> <general barrier>
1003 LOAD Y LOAD X
1004
1005This substitution destroys transitivity: in this example, it is perfectly
1006legal for CPU 2's load from X to return 1, its load from Y to return 0,
1007and CPU 3's load from X to return 0.
1008
1009The key point is that although CPU 2's read barrier orders its pair
1010of loads, it does not guarantee to order CPU 1's store. Therefore, if
1011this example runs on a system where CPUs 1 and 2 share a store buffer
1012or a level of cache, CPU 2 might have early access to CPU 1's writes.
1013General barriers are therefore required to ensure that all CPUs agree
1014on the combined order of CPU 1's and CPU 2's accesses.
1015
1016To reiterate, if your code requires transitivity, use general barriers
1017throughout.
1018
1019
962======================== 1020========================
963EXPLICIT KERNEL BARRIERS 1021EXPLICIT KERNEL BARRIERS
964======================== 1022========================
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
index 57e7e9cc1870..8f485d72cf25 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-hotplug.txt
@@ -126,36 +126,51 @@ config options.
126-------------------------------- 126--------------------------------
1274 sysfs files for memory hotplug 1274 sysfs files for memory hotplug
128-------------------------------- 128--------------------------------
129All sections have their device information under /sys/devices/system/memory as 129All sections have their device information in sysfs. Each section is part of
130a memory block under /sys/devices/system/memory as
130 131
131/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX 132/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX
132(XXX is section id.) 133(XXX is the section id.)
133 134
134Now, XXX is defined as start_address_of_section / section_size. 135Now, XXX is defined as (start_address_of_section / section_size) of the first
136section contained in the memory block. The files 'phys_index' and
137'end_phys_index' under each directory report the beginning and end section id's
138for the memory block covered by the sysfs directory. It is expected that all
139memory sections in this range are present and no memory holes exist in the
140range. Currently there is no way to determine if there is a memory hole, but
141the existence of one should not affect the hotplug capabilities of the memory
142block.
135 143
136For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at 144For example, assume 1GiB section size. A device for a memory starting at
1370x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4 1450x100000000 is /sys/device/system/memory/memory4
138(0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4) 146(0x100000000 / 1Gib = 4)
139This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000) 147This device covers address range [0x100000000 ... 0x140000000)
140 148
141Under each section, you can see 4 files. 149Under each section, you can see 4 or 5 files, the end_phys_index file being
150a recent addition and not present on older kernels.
142 151
143/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_index 152/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/start_phys_index
153/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/end_phys_index
144/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device 154/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/phys_device
145/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state 155/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/state
146/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable 156/sys/devices/system/memory/memoryXXX/removable
147 157
148'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id, same as XXX. 158'phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the first section
149'state' : read-write 159 in the memory block, same as XXX.
150 at read: contains online/offline state of memory. 160'end_phys_index' : read-only and contains section id of the last section
151 at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command 161 in the memory block.
152'phys_device': read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory device. 162'state' : read-write
153 This is not well implemented now. 163 at read: contains online/offline state of memory.
154'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating 164 at write: user can specify "online", "offline" command
155 whether the memory section is removable or not 165 which will be performed on al sections in the block.
156 removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory 166'phys_device' : read-only: designed to show the name of physical memory
157 section is removable and a value of 0 indicates that 167 device. This is not well implemented now.
158 it is not removable. 168'removable' : read-only: contains an integer value indicating
169 whether the memory block is removable or not
170 removable. A value of 1 indicates that the memory
171 block is removable and a value of 0 indicates that
172 it is not removable. A memory block is removable only if
173 every section in the block is removable.
159 174
160NOTE: 175NOTE:
161 These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase. 176 These directories/files appear after physical memory hotplug phase.
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d
index 06534f25e643..f1a4ec840f86 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lis3lv02d
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/lis3lv02d
@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ Description
17This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops 17This driver provides support for the accelerometer found in various HP laptops
18sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or 18sporting the feature officially called "HP Mobile Data Protection System 3D" or
19"HP 3D DriveGuard". It detects automatically laptops with this sensor. Known 19"HP 3D DriveGuard". It detects automatically laptops with this sensor. Known
20models (full list can be found in drivers/hwmon/hp_accel.c) will have their 20models (full list can be found in drivers/platform/x86/hp_accel.c) will have
21axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play 21their axis automatically oriented on standard way (eg: you can directly play
22neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via 22neverball). The accelerometer data is readable via
23/sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d. Reported values are scaled 23/sys/devices/platform/lis3lv02d. Reported values are scaled
24to mg values (1/1000th of earth gravity). 24to mg values (1/1000th of earth gravity).
diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt b/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02c13ef5e908
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/spear-pcie-gadget.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
1Spear PCIe Gadget Driver:
2
3Author
4=============
5Pratyush Anand (pratyush.anand@st.com)
6
7Location
8============
9driver/misc/spear13xx_pcie_gadget.c
10
11Supported Chip:
12===================
13SPEAr1300
14SPEAr1310
15
16Menuconfig option:
17==========================
18Device Drivers
19 Misc devices
20 PCIe gadget support for SPEAr13XX platform
21purpose
22===========
23This driver has several nodes which can be read/written by configfs interface.
24Its main purpose is to configure selected dual mode PCIe controller as device
25and then program its various registers to configure it as a particular device
26type. This driver can be used to show spear's PCIe device capability.
27
28Description of different nodes:
29=================================
30
31read behavior of nodes:
32------------------------------
33link :gives ltssm status.
34int_type :type of supported interrupt
35no_of_msi :zero if MSI is not enabled by host. A positive value is the
36 number of MSI vector granted.
37vendor_id :returns programmed vendor id (hex)
38device_id :returns programmed device id(hex)
39bar0_size: :returns size of bar0 in hex.
40bar0_address :returns address of bar0 mapped area in hex.
41bar0_rw_offset :returns offset of bar0 for which bar0_data will return value.
42bar0_data :returns data at bar0_rw_offset.
43
44write behavior of nodes:
45------------------------------
46link :write UP to enable ltsmm DOWN to disable
47int_type :write interrupt type to be configured and (int_type could be
48 INTA, MSI or NO_INT). Select MSI only when you have programmed
49 no_of_msi node.
50no_of_msi :number of MSI vector needed.
51inta :write 1 to assert INTA and 0 to de-assert.
52send_msi :write MSI vector to be sent.
53vendor_id :write vendor id(hex) to be programmed.
54device_id :write device id(hex) to be programmed.
55bar0_size :write size of bar0 in hex. default bar0 size is 1000 (hex)
56 bytes.
57bar0_address :write address of bar0 mapped area in hex. (default mapping of
58 bar0 is SYSRAM1(E0800000). Always program bar size before bar
59 address. Kernel might modify bar size and address for alignment, so
60 read back bar size and address after writing to cross check.
61bar0_rw_offset :write offset of bar0 for which bar0_data will write value.
62bar0_data :write data to be written at bar0_rw_offset.
63
64Node programming example
65===========================
66Program all PCIe registers in such a way that when this device is connected
67to the PCIe host, then host sees this device as 1MB RAM.
68#mount -t configfs none /Config
69For nth PCIe Device Controller
70# cd /config/pcie_gadget.n/
71Now you have all the nodes in this directory.
72program vendor id as 0x104a
73# echo 104A >> vendor_id
74
75program device id as 0xCD80
76# echo CD80 >> device_id
77
78program BAR0 size as 1MB
79# echo 100000 >> bar0_size
80
81check for programmed bar0 size
82# cat bar0_size
83
84Program BAR0 Address as DDR (0x2100000). This is the physical address of
85memory, which is to be made visible to PCIe host. Similarly any other peripheral
86can also be made visible to PCIe host. E.g., if you program base address of UART
87as BAR0 address then when this device will be connected to a host, it will be
88visible as UART.
89# echo 2100000 >> bar0_address
90
91program interrupt type : INTA
92# echo INTA >> int_type
93
94go for link up now.
95# echo UP >> link
96
97It will have to be insured that, once link up is done on gadget, then only host
98is initialized and start to search PCIe devices on its port.
99
100/*wait till link is up*/
101# cat link
102wait till it returns UP.
103
104To assert INTA
105# echo 1 >> inta
106
107To de-assert INTA
108# echo 0 >> inta
109
110if MSI is to be used as interrupt, program no of msi vector needed (say4)
111# echo 4 >> no_of_msi
112
113select MSI as interrupt type
114# echo MSI >> int_type
115
116go for link up now
117# echo UP >> link
118
119wait till link is up
120# cat link
121An application can repetitively read this node till link is found UP. It can
122sleep between two read.
123
124wait till msi is enabled
125# cat no_of_msi
126Should return 4 (number of requested MSI vector)
127
128to send msi vector 2
129# echo 2 >> send_msi
130#cd -
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
index 77f0cdd5b0dd..18afcd8afd51 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
1[state: 21-11-2010] 1[state: 27-01-2011]
2 2
3BATMAN-ADV 3BATMAN-ADV
4---------- 4----------
@@ -67,15 +67,16 @@ All mesh wide settings can be found in batman's own interface
67folder: 67folder:
68 68
69# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/ 69# ls /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/
70# aggregated_ogms bonding fragmentation orig_interval 70# aggregated_ogms gw_bandwidth hop_penalty
71# vis_mode 71# bonding gw_mode orig_interval
72# fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode
72 73
73 74
74There is a special folder for debugging informations: 75There is a special folder for debugging informations:
75 76
76# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ 77# ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/
77# originators socket transtable_global transtable_local 78# gateways socket transtable_global vis_data
78# vis_data 79# originators softif_neigh transtable_local
79 80
80 81
81Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard- 82Some of the files contain all sort of status information regard-
@@ -230,9 +231,8 @@ CONTACT
230Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :) 231Please send us comments, experiences, questions, anything :)
231 232
232IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org 233IRC: #batman on irc.freenode.org
233Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@b.a.t.m.a.n@lists.open-mesh.org 234Mailing-list: b.a.t.m.a.n@open-mesh.org (optional subscription
234 (optional subscription at 235 at https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n)
235 https://lists.open-mesh.org/mm/listinfo/b.a.t.m.a.n)
236 236
237You can also contact the Authors: 237You can also contact the Authors:
238 238
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
index 25d2f4141d27..b36e741e94db 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
@@ -2558,18 +2558,15 @@ enslaved.
255816. Resources and Links 255816. Resources and Links
2559======================= 2559=======================
2560 2560
2561The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest 2561 The latest version of the bonding driver can be found in the latest
2562version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org 2562version of the linux kernel, found on http://kernel.org
2563 2563
2564The latest version of this document can be found in either the latest 2564 The latest version of this document can be found in the latest kernel
2565kernel source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt), or on the 2565source (named Documentation/networking/bonding.txt).
2566bonding sourceforge site:
2567 2566
2568http://www.sourceforge.net/projects/bonding 2567 Discussions regarding the usage of the bonding driver take place on the
2569 2568bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have questions or
2570Discussions regarding the bonding driver take place primarily on the 2569problems, post them to the list. The list address is:
2571bonding-devel mailing list, hosted at sourceforge.net. If you have
2572questions or problems, post them to the list. The list address is:
2573 2570
2574bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net 2571bonding-devel@lists.sourceforge.net
2575 2572
@@ -2578,6 +2575,17 @@ be found at:
2578 2575
2579https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel 2576https://lists.sourceforge.net/lists/listinfo/bonding-devel
2580 2577
2578 Discussions regarding the developpement of the bonding driver take place
2579on the main Linux network mailing list, hosted at vger.kernel.org. The list
2580address is:
2581
2582netdev@vger.kernel.org
2583
2584 The administrative interface (to subscribe or unsubscribe) can
2585be found at:
2586
2587http://vger.kernel.org/vger-lists.html#netdev
2588
2581Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at : 2589Donald Becker's Ethernet Drivers and diag programs may be found at :
2582 - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.scyld.com/network/ 2590 - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.scyld.com/network/
2583 2591
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
index ac3b4a726a1a..d3d653a5f9b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
@@ -280,6 +280,17 @@ tcp_max_orphans - INTEGER
280 more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats 280 more aggressively. Let me to remind again: each orphan eats
281 up to ~64K of unswappable memory. 281 up to ~64K of unswappable memory.
282 282
283tcp_max_ssthresh - INTEGER
284 Limited Slow-Start for TCP with large congestion windows (cwnd) defined in
285 RFC3742. Limited slow-start is a mechanism to limit growth of the cwnd
286 on the region where cwnd is larger than tcp_max_ssthresh. TCP increases cwnd
287 by at most tcp_max_ssthresh segments, and by at least tcp_max_ssthresh/2
288 segments per RTT when the cwnd is above tcp_max_ssthresh.
289 If TCP connection increased cwnd to thousands (or tens of thousands) segments,
290 and thousands of packets were being dropped during slow-start, you can set
291 tcp_max_ssthresh to improve performance for new TCP connection.
292 Default: 0 (off)
293
283tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER 294tcp_max_syn_backlog - INTEGER
284 Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which are 295 Maximal number of remembered connection requests, which are
285 still did not receive an acknowledgment from connecting client. 296 still did not receive an acknowledgment from connecting client.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
index 24ad2adba6e5..81003581f47a 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/phonet.txt
@@ -154,9 +154,28 @@ connections, one per accept()'d socket.
154 write(cfd, msg, msglen); 154 write(cfd, msg, msglen);
155 } 155 }
156 156
157Connections are established between two endpoints by a "third party" 157Connections are traditionally established between two endpoints by a
158application. This means that both endpoints are passive; so connect() 158"third party" application. This means that both endpoints are passive.
159is not possible. 159
160
161As of Linux kernel version 2.6.39, it is also possible to connect
162two endpoints directly, using connect() on the active side. This is
163intended to support the newer Nokia Wireless Modem API, as found in
164e.g. the Nokia Slim Modem in the ST-Ericsson U8500 platform:
165
166 struct sockaddr_spn spn;
167 int fd;
168
169 fd = socket(PF_PHONET, SOCK_SEQPACKET, PN_PROTO_PIPE);
170 memset(&spn, 0, sizeof(spn));
171 spn.spn_family = AF_PHONET;
172 spn.spn_obj = ...;
173 spn.spn_dev = ...;
174 spn.spn_resource = 0xD9;
175 connect(fd, (struct sockaddr *)&spn, sizeof(spn));
176 /* normal I/O here ... */
177 close(fd);
178
160 179
161WARNING: 180WARNING:
162When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an 181When polling a connected pipe socket for writability, there is an
@@ -181,45 +200,9 @@ The pipe protocol provides two socket options at the SOL_PNPIPE level:
181 interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP, 200 interface index of the network interface created by PNPIPE_ENCAP,
182 or zero if encapsulation is off. 201 or zero if encapsulation is off.
183 202
184 203 PNPIPE_HANDLE is a read-only integer value. It contains the underlying
185Phonet Pipe-controller Implementation 204 identifier ("pipe handle") of the pipe. This is only defined for
186------------------------------------- 205 socket descriptors that are already connected or being connected.
187
188Phonet Pipe-controller is enabled by selecting the CONFIG_PHONET_PIPECTRLR Kconfig
189option. It is useful when communicating with those Nokia Modems which do not
190implement Pipe controller in them e.g. Nokia Slim Modem used in ST-Ericsson
191U8500 platform.
192
193The implementation is based on the Data Connection Establishment Sequence
194depicted in 'Nokia Wireless Modem API - Wireless_modem_user_guide.pdf'
195document.
196
197It allows a phonet sequenced socket (host-pep) to initiate a Pipe connection
198between itself and a remote pipe-end point (e.g. modem).
199
200The implementation adds socket options at SOL_PNPIPE level:
201
202 PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE
203 It accepts an integer argument for setting value of pipe handle.
204
205 PNPIPE_ENABLE accepts one integer value (int). If set to zero, the pipe
206 is disabled. If the value is non-zero, the pipe is enabled. If the pipe
207 is not (yet) connected, ENOTCONN is error is returned.
208
209The implementation also adds socket 'connect'. On calling the 'connect', pipe
210will be created between the source socket and the destination, and the pipe
211state will be set to PIPE_DISABLED.
212
213After a pipe has been created and enabled successfully, the Pipe data can be
214exchanged between the host-pep and remote-pep (modem).
215
216User-space would typically follow below sequence with Pipe controller:-
217-socket
218-bind
219-setsockopt for PNPIPE_PIPE_HANDLE
220-connect
221-setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENCAP_IP
222-setsockopt for PNPIPE_ENABLE
223 206
224 207
225Authors 208Authors
diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt
index 57080cd74575..f023ba6bba62 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
1Device Power Management 1Device Power Management
2 2
3Copyright (c) 2010 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. 3Copyright (c) 2010-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
4Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> 4Copyright (c) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
5 5
6 6
@@ -159,18 +159,18 @@ matter, and the kernel is responsible for keeping track of it. By contrast,
159whether or not a wakeup-capable device should issue wakeup events is a policy 159whether or not a wakeup-capable device should issue wakeup events is a policy
160decision, and it is managed by user space through a sysfs attribute: the 160decision, and it is managed by user space through a sysfs attribute: the
161power/wakeup file. User space can write the strings "enabled" or "disabled" to 161power/wakeup file. User space can write the strings "enabled" or "disabled" to
162set or clear the should_wakeup flag, respectively. Reads from the file will 162set or clear the "should_wakeup" flag, respectively. This file is only present
163return the corresponding string if can_wakeup is true, but if can_wakeup is 163for wakeup-capable devices (i.e. devices whose "can_wakeup" flags are set)
164false then reads will return an empty string, to indicate that the device 164and is created (or removed) by device_set_wakeup_capable(). Reads from the
165doesn't support wakeup events. (But even though the file appears empty, writes 165file will return the corresponding string.
166will still affect the should_wakeup flag.)
167 166
168The device_may_wakeup() routine returns true only if both flags are set. 167The device_may_wakeup() routine returns true only if both flags are set.
169Drivers should check this routine when putting devices in a low-power state 168This information is used by subsystems, like the PCI bus type code, to see
170during a system sleep transition, to see whether or not to enable the devices' 169whether or not to enable the devices' wakeup mechanisms. If device wakeup
171wakeup mechanisms. However for runtime power management, wakeup events should 170mechanisms are enabled or disabled directly by drivers, they also should use
172be enabled whenever the device and driver both support them, regardless of the 171device_may_wakeup() to decide what to do during a system sleep transition.
173should_wakeup flag. 172However for runtime power management, wakeup events should be enabled whenever
173the device and driver both support them, regardless of the should_wakeup flag.
174 174
175 175
176/sys/devices/.../power/control files 176/sys/devices/.../power/control files
@@ -249,23 +249,18 @@ various phases always run after tasks have been frozen and before they are
249unfrozen. Furthermore, the *_noirq phases run at a time when IRQ handlers have 249unfrozen. Furthermore, the *_noirq phases run at a time when IRQ handlers have
250been disabled (except for those marked with the IRQ_WAKEUP flag). 250been disabled (except for those marked with the IRQ_WAKEUP flag).
251 251
252Most phases use bus, type, and class callbacks (that is, methods defined in 252All phases use bus, type, or class callbacks (that is, methods defined in
253dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, and dev->class->pm). The prepare and complete 253dev->bus->pm, dev->type->pm, or dev->class->pm). These callbacks are mutually
254phases are exceptions; they use only bus callbacks. When multiple callbacks 254exclusive, so if the device type provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to
255are used in a phase, they are invoked in the order: <class, type, bus> during 255by its pm field (i.e. both dev->type and dev->type->pm are defined), the
256power-down transitions and in the opposite order during power-up transitions. 256callbacks included in that object (i.e. dev->type->pm) will be used. Otherwise,
257For example, during the suspend phase the PM core invokes 257if the class provides a struct dev_pm_ops object pointed to by its pm field
258 258(i.e. both dev->class and dev->class->pm are defined), the PM core will use the
259 dev->class->pm.suspend(dev); 259callbacks from that object (i.e. dev->class->pm). Finally, if the pm fields of
260 dev->type->pm.suspend(dev); 260both the device type and class objects are NULL (or those objects do not exist),
261 dev->bus->pm.suspend(dev); 261the callbacks provided by the bus (that is, the callbacks from dev->bus->pm)
262 262will be used (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus
263before moving on to the next device, whereas during the resume phase the core 263types or classes if necessary).
264invokes
265
266 dev->bus->pm.resume(dev);
267 dev->type->pm.resume(dev);
268 dev->class->pm.resume(dev);
269 264
270These callbacks may in turn invoke device- or driver-specific methods stored in 265These callbacks may in turn invoke device- or driver-specific methods stored in
271dev->driver->pm, but they don't have to. 266dev->driver->pm, but they don't have to.
@@ -507,6 +502,49 @@ routines. Nevertheless, different callback pointers are used in case there is a
507situation where it actually matters. 502situation where it actually matters.
508 503
509 504
505Device Power Domains
506--------------------
507Sometimes devices share reference clocks or other power resources. In those
508cases it generally is not possible to put devices into low-power states
509individually. Instead, a set of devices sharing a power resource can be put
510into a low-power state together at the same time by turning off the shared
511power resource. Of course, they also need to be put into the full-power state
512together, by turning the shared power resource on. A set of devices with this
513property is often referred to as a power domain.
514
515Support for power domains is provided through the pwr_domain field of struct
516device. This field is a pointer to an object of type struct dev_power_domain,
517defined in include/linux/pm.h, providing a set of power management callbacks
518analogous to the subsystem-level and device driver callbacks that are executed
519for the given device during all power transitions, in addition to the respective
520subsystem-level callbacks. Specifically, the power domain "suspend" callbacks
521(i.e. ->runtime_suspend(), ->suspend(), ->freeze(), ->poweroff(), etc.) are
522executed after the analogous subsystem-level callbacks, while the power domain
523"resume" callbacks (i.e. ->runtime_resume(), ->resume(), ->thaw(), ->restore,
524etc.) are executed before the analogous subsystem-level callbacks. Error codes
525returned by the "suspend" and "resume" power domain callbacks are ignored.
526
527Power domain ->runtime_idle() callback is executed before the subsystem-level
528->runtime_idle() callback and the result returned by it is not ignored. Namely,
529if it returns error code, the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle() callback will not
530be called and the helper function rpm_idle() executing it will return error
531code. This mechanism is intended to help platforms where saving device state
532is a time consuming operation and should only be carried out if all devices
533in the power domain are idle, before turning off the shared power resource(s).
534Namely, the power domain ->runtime_idle() callback may return error code until
535the pm_runtime_idle() helper (or its asychronous version) has been called for
536all devices in the power domain (it is recommended that the returned error code
537be -EBUSY in those cases), preventing the subsystem-level ->runtime_idle()
538callback from being run prematurely.
539
540The support for device power domains is only relevant to platforms needing to
541use the same subsystem-level (e.g. platform bus type) and device driver power
542management callbacks in many different power domain configurations and wanting
543to avoid incorporating the support for power domains into the subsystem-level
544callbacks. The other platforms need not implement it or take it into account
545in any way.
546
547
510System Devices 548System Devices
511-------------- 549--------------
512System devices (sysdevs) follow a slightly different API, which can be found in 550System devices (sysdevs) follow a slightly different API, which can be found in
diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index ffe55ffa540a..654097b130b4 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
1Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices 1Run-time Power Management Framework for I/O Devices
2 2
3(C) 2009 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc. 3(C) 2009-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, Novell Inc.
4(C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu> 4(C) 2010 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
5 5
61. Introduction 61. Introduction
@@ -44,11 +44,12 @@ struct dev_pm_ops {
44}; 44};
45 45
46The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are 46The ->runtime_suspend(), ->runtime_resume() and ->runtime_idle() callbacks are
47executed by the PM core for either the bus type, or device type (if the bus 47executed by the PM core for either the device type, or the class (if the device
48type's callback is not defined), or device class (if the bus type's and device 48type's struct dev_pm_ops object does not exist), or the bus type (if the
49type's callbacks are not defined) of given device. The bus type, device type 49device type's and class' struct dev_pm_ops objects do not exist) of the given
50and device class callbacks are referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what 50device (this allows device types to override callbacks provided by bus types or
51follows. 51classes if necessary). The bus type, device type and class callbacks are
52referred to as subsystem-level callbacks in what follows.
52 53
53By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts 54By default, the callbacks are always invoked in process context with interrupts
54enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function 55enabled. However, subsystems can use the pm_runtime_irq_safe() helper function
diff --git a/Documentation/power/states.txt b/Documentation/power/states.txt
index 34800cc521bf..4416b28630df 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/states.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/states.txt
@@ -62,12 +62,12 @@ setup via another operating system for it to use. Despite the
62inconvenience, this method requires minimal work by the kernel, since 62inconvenience, this method requires minimal work by the kernel, since
63the firmware will also handle restoring memory contents on resume. 63the firmware will also handle restoring memory contents on resume.
64 64
65For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called swsusp called 'swsusp' (Swap 65For suspend-to-disk, a mechanism called 'swsusp' (Swap Suspend) is used
66Suspend) is used to write memory contents to free swap space. 66to write memory contents to free swap space. swsusp has some restrictive
67swsusp has some restrictive requirements, but should work in most 67requirements, but should work in most cases. Some, albeit outdated,
68cases. Some, albeit outdated, documentation can be found in 68documentation can be found in Documentation/power/swsusp.txt.
69Documentation/power/swsusp.txt. Alternatively, userspace can do most 69Alternatively, userspace can do most of the actual suspend to disk work,
70of the actual suspend to disk work, see userland-swsusp.txt. 70see userland-swsusp.txt.
71 71
72Once memory state is written to disk, the system may either enter a 72Once memory state is written to disk, the system may either enter a
73low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering 73low-power state (like ACPI S4), or it may simply power down. Powering
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
index e3960b8c8689..5620fb5ac425 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/00-INDEX
@@ -5,8 +5,6 @@ please mail me.
5 5
600-INDEX 600-INDEX
7 - this file 7 - this file
8booting-without-of.txt
9 - Booting the Linux/ppc kernel without Open Firmware
10cpu_features.txt 8cpu_features.txt
11 - info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time 9 - info on how we support a variety of CPUs with minimal compile-time
12 options. 10 options.
@@ -16,8 +14,6 @@ hvcs.txt
16 - IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide 14 - IBM "Hypervisor Virtual Console Server" Installation Guide
17mpc52xx.txt 15mpc52xx.txt
18 - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family 16 - Linux 2.6.x on MPC52xx family
19mpc52xx-device-tree-bindings.txt
20 - MPC5200 Device Tree Bindings
21sound.txt 17sound.txt
22 - info on sound support under Linux/PPC 18 - info on sound support under Linux/PPC
23zImage_layout.txt 19zImage_layout.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/rtc.txt b/Documentation/rtc.txt
index 9104c1062084..250160469d83 100644
--- a/Documentation/rtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rtc.txt
@@ -178,38 +178,29 @@ RTC class framework, but can't be supported by the older driver.
178 setting the longer alarm time and enabling its IRQ using a single 178 setting the longer alarm time and enabling its IRQ using a single
179 request (using the same model as EFI firmware). 179 request (using the same model as EFI firmware).
180 180
181 * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, it probably 181 * RTC_UIE_ON, RTC_UIE_OFF ... if the RTC offers IRQs, the RTC framework
182 also offers update IRQs whenever the "seconds" counter changes. 182 will emulate this mechanism.
183 If needed, the RTC framework can emulate this mechanism.
184 183
185 * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... another 184 * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF, RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ ... these icotls
186 feature often accessible with an IRQ line is a periodic IRQ, issued 185 are emulated via a kernel hrtimer.
187 at settable frequencies (usually 2^N Hz).
188 186
189In many cases, the RTC alarm can be a system wake event, used to force 187In many cases, the RTC alarm can be a system wake event, used to force
190Linux out of a low power sleep state (or hibernation) back to a fully 188Linux out of a low power sleep state (or hibernation) back to a fully
191operational state. For example, a system could enter a deep power saving 189operational state. For example, a system could enter a deep power saving
192state until it's time to execute some scheduled tasks. 190state until it's time to execute some scheduled tasks.
193 191
194Note that many of these ioctls need not actually be implemented by your 192Note that many of these ioctls are handled by the common rtc-dev interface.
195driver. The common rtc-dev interface handles many of these nicely if your 193Some common examples:
196driver returns ENOIOCTLCMD. Some common examples:
197 194
198 * RTC_RD_TIME, RTC_SET_TIME: the read_time/set_time functions will be 195 * RTC_RD_TIME, RTC_SET_TIME: the read_time/set_time functions will be
199 called with appropriate values. 196 called with appropriate values.
200 197
201 * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: the 198 * RTC_ALM_SET, RTC_ALM_READ, RTC_WKALM_SET, RTC_WKALM_RD: gets or sets
202 set_alarm/read_alarm functions will be called. 199 the alarm rtc_timer. May call the set_alarm driver function.
203 200
204 * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: the irq_set_freq function will be called 201 * RTC_IRQP_SET, RTC_IRQP_READ: These are emulated by the generic code.
205 to set the frequency while the framework will handle the read for you
206 since the frequency is stored in the irq_freq member of the rtc_device
207 structure. Your driver needs to initialize the irq_freq member during
208 init. Make sure you check the requested frequency is in range of your
209 hardware in the irq_set_freq function. If it isn't, return -EINVAL. If
210 you cannot actually change the frequency, do not define irq_set_freq.
211 202
212 * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: the irq_set_state function will be called. 203 * RTC_PIE_ON, RTC_PIE_OFF: These are also emulated by the generic code.
213 204
214If all else fails, check out the rtc-test.c driver! 205If all else fails, check out the rtc-test.c driver!
215 206
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
index b64d10d221ec..4d9ce73ff730 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid_sas
@@ -1,3 +1,26 @@
1Release Date : Thu. Feb 24, 2011 17:00:00 PST 2010 -
2 (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
3 Adam Radford
4Current Version : 00.00.05.34-rc1
5Old Version : 00.00.05.29-rc1
6 1. Fix some failure gotos from megasas_probe_one(), etc.
7 2. Add missing check_and_restore_queue_depth() call in
8 complete_cmd_fusion().
9 3. Enable MSI-X before calling megasas_init_fw().
10 4. Call tasklet_schedule() even if outbound_intr_status == 0 for MFI based
11 boards in MSI-X mode.
12 5. Fix megasas_probe_one() to clear PCI_MSIX_FLAGS_ENABLE in msi control
13 register in kdump kernel.
14 6. Fix megasas_get_cmd() to only print "Command pool empty" if
15 megasas_dbg_lvl is set.
16 7. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to not filter by TYPE_DISK.
17 8. Fix megasas_build_dcdb_fusion() to use io_request->LUN[1] field.
18 9. Add MR_EVT_CFG_CLEARED to megasas_aen_polling().
19 10. Fix tasklet_init() in megasas_init_fw() to use instancet->tasklet.
20 11. Fix fault state handling in megasas_transition_to_ready().
21 12. Fix max_sectors setting for IEEE SGL's.
22 13. Fix iMR OCR support to work correctly.
23-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 - 24Release Date : Tues. Dec 14, 2010 17:00:00 PST 2010 -
2 (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com) 25 (emaild-id:megaraidlinux@lsi.com)
3 Adam Radford 26 Adam Radford
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt
index dca658362cbf..891435a72fce 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/hpsa.txt
@@ -28,6 +28,12 @@ boot parameter "hpsa_allow_any=1" is specified, however these are not tested
28nor supported by HP with this driver. For older Smart Arrays, the cciss 28nor supported by HP with this driver. For older Smart Arrays, the cciss
29driver should still be used. 29driver should still be used.
30 30
31The "hpsa_simple_mode=1" boot parameter may be used to prevent the driver from
32putting the controller into "performant" mode. The difference is that with simple
33mode, each command completion requires an interrupt, while with "performant mode"
34(the default, and ordinarily better performing) it is possible to have multiple
35command completions indicated by a single interrupt.
36
31HPSA specific entries in /sys 37HPSA specific entries in /sys
32----------------------------- 38-----------------------------
33 39
@@ -39,6 +45,8 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys
39 45
40 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/rescan 46 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/rescan
41 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/firmware_revision 47 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/firmware_revision
48 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/resettable
49 /sys/class/scsi_host/host*/transport_mode
42 50
43 the host "rescan" attribute is a write only attribute. Writing to this 51 the host "rescan" attribute is a write only attribute. Writing to this
44 attribute will cause the driver to scan for new, changed, or removed devices 52 attribute will cause the driver to scan for new, changed, or removed devices
@@ -55,6 +63,21 @@ HPSA specific entries in /sys
55 root@host:/sys/class/scsi_host/host4# cat firmware_revision 63 root@host:/sys/class/scsi_host/host4# cat firmware_revision
56 7.14 64 7.14
57 65
66 The transport_mode indicates whether the controller is in "performant"
67 or "simple" mode. This is controlled by the "hpsa_simple_mode" module
68 parameter.
69
70 The "resettable" read-only attribute indicates whether a particular
71 controller is able to honor the "reset_devices" kernel parameter. If the
72 device is resettable, this file will contain a "1", otherwise, a "0". This
73 parameter is used by kdump, for example, to reset the controller at driver
74 load time to eliminate any outstanding commands on the controller and get the
75 controller into a known state so that the kdump initiated i/o will work right
76 and not be disrupted in any way by stale commands or other stale state
77 remaining on the controller from the previous kernel. This attribute enables
78 kexec tools to warn the user if they attempt to designate a device which is
79 unable to honor the reset_devices kernel parameter as a dump device.
80
58 HPSA specific disk attributes: 81 HPSA specific disk attributes:
59 ------------------------------ 82 ------------------------------
60 83
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
index df322c103466..5f17d29c59b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_mid_low_api.txt
@@ -1343,7 +1343,7 @@ Members of interest:
1343 underruns (overruns should be rare). If possible an LLD 1343 underruns (overruns should be rare). If possible an LLD
1344 should set 'resid' prior to invoking 'done'. The most 1344 should set 'resid' prior to invoking 'done'. The most
1345 interesting case is data transfers from a SCSI target 1345 interesting case is data transfers from a SCSI target
1346 device device (i.e. READs) that underrun. 1346 device (e.g. READs) that underrun.
1347 underflow - LLD should place (DID_ERROR << 16) in 'result' if 1347 underflow - LLD should place (DID_ERROR << 16) in 'result' if
1348 actual number of bytes transferred is less than this 1348 actual number of bytes transferred is less than this
1349 figure. Not many LLDs implement this check and some that 1349 figure. Not many LLDs implement this check and some that
@@ -1351,6 +1351,18 @@ Members of interest:
1351 report a DID_ERROR. Better for an LLD to implement 1351 report a DID_ERROR. Better for an LLD to implement
1352 'resid'. 1352 'resid'.
1353 1353
1354It is recommended that a LLD set 'resid' on data transfers from a SCSI
1355target device (e.g. READs). It is especially important that 'resid' is set
1356when such data transfers have sense keys of MEDIUM ERROR and HARDWARE ERROR
1357(and possibly RECOVERED ERROR). In these cases if a LLD is in doubt how much
1358data has been received then the safest approach is to indicate no bytes have
1359been received. For example: to indicate that no valid data has been received
1360a LLD might use these helpers:
1361 scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt));
1362where 'SCpnt' is a pointer to a scsi_cmnd object. To indicate only three 512
1363bytes blocks has been received 'resid' could be set like this:
1364 scsi_set_resid(SCpnt, scsi_bufflen(SCpnt) - (3 * 512));
1365
1354The scsi_cmnd structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_cmnd.h 1366The scsi_cmnd structure is defined in include/scsi/scsi_cmnd.h
1355 1367
1356 1368
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..397f41a1f153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
1n_gsm.c GSM 0710 tty multiplexor HOWTO
2===================================================
3
4This line discipline implements the GSM 07.10 multiplexing protocol
5detailed in the following 3GPP document :
6http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/07_series/07.10/0710-720.zip
7
8This document give some hints on how to use this driver with GPRS and 3G
9modems connected to a physical serial port.
10
11How to use it
12-------------
131- initialize the modem in 0710 mux mode (usually AT+CMUX= command) through
14its serial port. Depending on the modem used, you can pass more or less
15parameters to this command,
162- switch the serial line to using the n_gsm line discipline by using
17TIOCSETD ioctl,
183- configure the mux using GSMIOC_GETCONF / GSMIOC_SETCONF ioctl,
19
20Major parts of the initialization program :
21(a good starting point is util-linux-ng/sys-utils/ldattach.c)
22#include <linux/gsmmux.h>
23#define N_GSM0710 21 /* GSM 0710 Mux */
24#define DEFAULT_SPEED B115200
25#define SERIAL_PORT /dev/ttyS0
26
27 int ldisc = N_GSM0710;
28 struct gsm_config c;
29 struct termios configuration;
30
31 /* open the serial port connected to the modem */
32 fd = open(SERIAL_PORT, O_RDWR | O_NOCTTY | O_NDELAY);
33
34 /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */
35
36 /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode
37 and check that it's succesful (should return OK) */
38 write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10);
39
40 /* experience showed that some modems need some time before
41 being able to answer to the first MUX packet so a delay
42 may be needed here in some case */
43 sleep(3);
44
45 /* use n_gsm line discipline */
46 ioctl(fd, TIOCSETD, &ldisc);
47
48 /* get n_gsm configuration */
49 ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_GETCONF, &c);
50 /* we are initiator and need encoding 0 (basic) */
51 c.initiator = 1;
52 c.encapsulation = 0;
53 /* our modem defaults to a maximum size of 127 bytes */
54 c.mru = 127;
55 c.mtu = 127;
56 /* set the new configuration */
57 ioctl(fd, GSMIOC_SETCONF, &c);
58
59 /* and wait for ever to keep the line discipline enabled */
60 daemon(0,0);
61 pause();
62
634- create the devices corresponding to the "virtual" serial ports (take care,
64each modem has its configuration and some DLC have dedicated functions,
65for example GPS), starting with minor 1 (DLC0 is reserved for the management
66of the mux)
67
68MAJOR=`cat /proc/devices |grep gsmtty | awk '{print $1}`
69for i in `seq 1 4`; do
70 mknod /dev/ttygsm$i c $MAJOR $i
71done
72
735- use these devices as plain serial ports.
74for example, it's possible :
75- and to use gnokii to send / receive SMS on ttygsm1
76- to use ppp to establish a datalink on ttygsm2
77
786- first close all virtual ports before closing the physical port.
79
80Additional Documentation
81------------------------
82More practical details on the protocol and how it's supported by industrial
83modems can be found in the following documents :
84http://www.telit.com/module/infopool/download.php?id=616
85http://www.u-blox.com/images/downloads/Product_Docs/LEON-G100-G200-MuxImplementation_ApplicationNote_%28GSM%20G1-CS-10002%29.pdf
86http://www.sierrawireless.com/Support/Downloads/AirPrime/WMP_Series/~/media/Support_Downloads/AirPrime/Application_notes/CMUX_Feature_Application_Note-Rev004.ashx
87http://wm.sim.com/sim/News/photo/2010721161442.pdf
88
8911-03-08 - Eric B茅nard - <eric@eukrea.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
index 178c831b907d..2e3c64b1a6a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/spinlocks.txt
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ to change the variables it has to get an exclusive write lock.
86 86
87The routines look the same as above: 87The routines look the same as above:
88 88
89 rwlock_t xxx_lock = RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED; 89 rwlock_t xxx_lock = __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED(xxx_lock);
90 90
91 unsigned long flags; 91 unsigned long flags;
92 92
@@ -196,25 +196,3 @@ appropriate:
196 196
197For static initialization, use DEFINE_SPINLOCK() / DEFINE_RWLOCK() or 197For static initialization, use DEFINE_SPINLOCK() / DEFINE_RWLOCK() or
198__SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED() / __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED() as appropriate. 198__SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED() / __RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED() as appropriate.
199
200SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED and RW_LOCK_UNLOCKED are deprecated. These interfere
201with lockdep state tracking.
202
203Most of the time, you can simply turn:
204 static spinlock_t xxx_lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
205into:
206 static DEFINE_SPINLOCK(xxx_lock);
207
208Static structure member variables go from:
209
210 struct foo bar {
211 .lock = SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED;
212 };
213
214to:
215
216 struct foo bar {
217 .lock = __SPIN_LOCK_UNLOCKED(bar.lock);
218 };
219
220Declaration of static rw_locks undergo a similar transformation.
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
index 62682500878a..4af0614147ef 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/fs.txt
@@ -88,20 +88,19 @@ you might want to raise the limit.
88 88
89file-max & file-nr: 89file-max & file-nr:
90 90
91The kernel allocates file handles dynamically, but as yet it
92doesn't free them again.
93
94The value in file-max denotes the maximum number of file- 91The value in file-max denotes the maximum number of file-
95handles that the Linux kernel will allocate. When you get lots 92handles that the Linux kernel will allocate. When you get lots
96of error messages about running out of file handles, you might 93of error messages about running out of file handles, you might
97want to increase this limit. 94want to increase this limit.
98 95
99Historically, the three values in file-nr denoted the number of 96Historically,the kernel was able to allocate file handles
100allocated file handles, the number of allocated but unused file 97dynamically, but not to free them again. The three values in
101handles, and the maximum number of file handles. Linux 2.6 always 98file-nr denote the number of allocated file handles, the number
102reports 0 as the number of free file handles -- this is not an 99of allocated but unused file handles, and the maximum number of
103error, it just means that the number of allocated file handles 100file handles. Linux 2.6 always reports 0 as the number of free
104exactly matches the number of used file handles. 101file handles -- this is not an error, it just means that the
102number of allocated file handles exactly matches the number of
103used file handles.
105 104
106Attempts to allocate more file descriptors than file-max are 105Attempts to allocate more file descriptors than file-max are
107reported with printk, look for "VFS: file-max limit <number> 106reported with printk, look for "VFS: file-max limit <number>
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
index 11d5ceda5bb0..36f007514db3 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/kernel.txt
@@ -367,7 +367,7 @@ the different loglevels.
367 367
368- console_loglevel: messages with a higher priority than 368- console_loglevel: messages with a higher priority than
369 this will be printed to the console 369 this will be printed to the console
370- default_message_level: messages without an explicit priority 370- default_message_loglevel: messages without an explicit priority
371 will be printed with this priority 371 will be printed with this priority
372- minimum_console_loglevel: minimum (highest) value to which 372- minimum_console_loglevel: minimum (highest) value to which
373 console_loglevel can be set 373 console_loglevel can be set
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt
index dc52bd442c92..79fcafc7fd64 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace-design.txt
@@ -247,6 +247,13 @@ You need very few things to get the syscalls tracing in an arch.
247- Support the TIF_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINT thread flags. 247- Support the TIF_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINT thread flags.
248- Put the trace_sys_enter() and trace_sys_exit() tracepoints calls from ptrace 248- Put the trace_sys_enter() and trace_sys_exit() tracepoints calls from ptrace
249 in the ptrace syscalls tracing path. 249 in the ptrace syscalls tracing path.
250- If the system call table on this arch is more complicated than a simple array
251 of addresses of the system calls, implement an arch_syscall_addr to return
252 the address of a given system call.
253- If the symbol names of the system calls do not match the function names on
254 this arch, define ARCH_HAS_SYSCALL_MATCH_SYM_NAME in asm/ftrace.h and
255 implement arch_syscall_match_sym_name with the appropriate logic to return
256 true if the function name corresponds with the symbol name.
250- Tag this arch as HAVE_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINTS. 257- Tag this arch as HAVE_SYSCALL_TRACEPOINTS.
251 258
252 259
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
index 557c1edeccaf..1ebc24cf9a55 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
@@ -80,11 +80,11 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files:
80 tracers listed here can be configured by 80 tracers listed here can be configured by
81 echoing their name into current_tracer. 81 echoing their name into current_tracer.
82 82
83 tracing_enabled: 83 tracing_on:
84 84
85 This sets or displays whether the current_tracer 85 This sets or displays whether writing to the trace
86 is activated and tracing or not. Echo 0 into this 86 ring buffer is enabled. Echo 0 into this file to disable
87 file to disable the tracer or 1 to enable it. 87 the tracer or 1 to enable it.
88 88
89 trace: 89 trace:
90 90
@@ -202,10 +202,6 @@ Here is the list of current tracers that may be configured.
202 to draw a graph of function calls similar to C code 202 to draw a graph of function calls similar to C code
203 source. 203 source.
204 204
205 "sched_switch"
206
207 Traces the context switches and wakeups between tasks.
208
209 "irqsoff" 205 "irqsoff"
210 206
211 Traces the areas that disable interrupts and saves 207 Traces the areas that disable interrupts and saves
@@ -273,39 +269,6 @@ format, the function name that was traced "path_put" and the
273parent function that called this function "path_walk". The 269parent function that called this function "path_walk". The
274timestamp is the time at which the function was entered. 270timestamp is the time at which the function was entered.
275 271
276The sched_switch tracer also includes tracing of task wakeups
277and context switches.
278
279 ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 2916:115:S
280 ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R + 10:115:S
281 ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:R ==> 10:115:R
282 events/1-10 [01] 1453.070013: 10:115:S ==> 2916:115:R
283 kondemand/1-2916 [01] 1453.070013: 2916:115:S ==> 7:115:R
284 ksoftirqd/1-7 [01] 1453.070013: 7:115:S ==> 0:140:R
285
286Wake ups are represented by a "+" and the context switches are
287shown as "==>". The format is:
288
289 Context switches:
290
291 Previous task Next Task
292
293 <pid>:<prio>:<state> ==> <pid>:<prio>:<state>
294
295 Wake ups:
296
297 Current task Task waking up
298
299 <pid>:<prio>:<state> + <pid>:<prio>:<state>
300
301The prio is the internal kernel priority, which is the inverse
302of the priority that is usually displayed by user-space tools.
303Zero represents the highest priority (99). Prio 100 starts the
304"nice" priorities with 100 being equal to nice -20 and 139 being
305nice 19. The prio "140" is reserved for the idle task which is
306the lowest priority thread (pid 0).
307
308
309Latency trace format 272Latency trace format
310-------------------- 273--------------------
311 274
@@ -491,78 +454,10 @@ x494] <- /root/a.out[+0x4a8] <- /lib/libc-2.7.so[+0x1e1a6]
491 latencies, as described in "Latency 454 latencies, as described in "Latency
492 trace format". 455 trace format".
493 456
494sched_switch 457 overwrite - This controls what happens when the trace buffer is
495------------ 458 full. If "1" (default), the oldest events are
496 459 discarded and overwritten. If "0", then the newest
497This tracer simply records schedule switches. Here is an example 460 events are discarded.
498of how to use it.
499
500 # echo sched_switch > current_tracer
501 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled
502 # sleep 1
503 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled
504 # cat trace
505
506# tracer: sched_switch
507#
508# TASK-PID CPU# TIMESTAMP FUNCTION
509# | | | | |
510 bash-3997 [01] 240.132281: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:R
511 bash-3997 [01] 240.132284: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R
512 sleep-4055 [01] 240.132371: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R
513 bash-3997 [01] 240.132454: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:S
514 bash-3997 [01] 240.132457: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R
515 sleep-4055 [01] 240.132460: 4055:120:D ==> 3997:120:R
516 bash-3997 [01] 240.132463: 3997:120:R + 4055:120:D
517 bash-3997 [01] 240.132465: 3997:120:R ==> 4055:120:R
518 <idle>-0 [00] 240.132589: 0:140:R + 4:115:S
519 <idle>-0 [00] 240.132591: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R
520 ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132595: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R
521 <idle>-0 [00] 240.132598: 0:140:R + 4:115:S
522 <idle>-0 [00] 240.132599: 0:140:R ==> 4:115:R
523 ksoftirqd/0-4 [00] 240.132603: 4:115:S ==> 0:140:R
524 sleep-4055 [01] 240.133058: 4055:120:S ==> 3997:120:R
525 [...]
526
527
528As we have discussed previously about this format, the header
529shows the name of the trace and points to the options. The
530"FUNCTION" is a misnomer since here it represents the wake ups
531and context switches.
532
533The sched_switch file only lists the wake ups (represented with
534'+') and context switches ('==>') with the previous task or
535current task first followed by the next task or task waking up.
536The format for both of these is PID:KERNEL-PRIO:TASK-STATE.
537Remember that the KERNEL-PRIO is the inverse of the actual
538priority with zero (0) being the highest priority and the nice
539values starting at 100 (nice -20). Below is a quick chart to map
540the kernel priority to user land priorities.
541
542 Kernel Space User Space
543 ===============================================================
544 0(high) to 98(low) user RT priority 99(high) to 1(low)
545 with SCHED_RR or SCHED_FIFO
546 ---------------------------------------------------------------
547 99 sched_priority is not used in scheduling
548 decisions(it must be specified as 0)
549 ---------------------------------------------------------------
550 100(high) to 139(low) user nice -20(high) to 19(low)
551 ---------------------------------------------------------------
552 140 idle task priority
553 ---------------------------------------------------------------
554
555The task states are:
556
557 R - running : wants to run, may not actually be running
558 S - sleep : process is waiting to be woken up (handles signals)
559 D - disk sleep (uninterruptible sleep) : process must be woken up
560 (ignores signals)
561 T - stopped : process suspended
562 t - traced : process is being traced (with something like gdb)
563 Z - zombie : process waiting to be cleaned up
564 X - unknown
565
566 461
567ftrace_enabled 462ftrace_enabled
568-------------- 463--------------
@@ -607,10 +502,10 @@ an example:
607 # echo irqsoff > current_tracer 502 # echo irqsoff > current_tracer
608 # echo latency-format > trace_options 503 # echo latency-format > trace_options
609 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency 504 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
610 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 505 # echo 1 > tracing_on
611 # ls -ltr 506 # ls -ltr
612 [...] 507 [...]
613 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 508 # echo 0 > tracing_on
614 # cat trace 509 # cat trace
615# tracer: irqsoff 510# tracer: irqsoff
616# 511#
@@ -715,10 +610,10 @@ is much like the irqsoff tracer.
715 # echo preemptoff > current_tracer 610 # echo preemptoff > current_tracer
716 # echo latency-format > trace_options 611 # echo latency-format > trace_options
717 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency 612 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
718 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 613 # echo 1 > tracing_on
719 # ls -ltr 614 # ls -ltr
720 [...] 615 [...]
721 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 616 # echo 0 > tracing_on
722 # cat trace 617 # cat trace
723# tracer: preemptoff 618# tracer: preemptoff
724# 619#
@@ -863,10 +758,10 @@ tracers.
863 # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer 758 # echo preemptirqsoff > current_tracer
864 # echo latency-format > trace_options 759 # echo latency-format > trace_options
865 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency 760 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
866 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 761 # echo 1 > tracing_on
867 # ls -ltr 762 # ls -ltr
868 [...] 763 [...]
869 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 764 # echo 0 > tracing_on
870 # cat trace 765 # cat trace
871# tracer: preemptirqsoff 766# tracer: preemptirqsoff
872# 767#
@@ -1026,9 +921,9 @@ Instead of performing an 'ls', we will run 'sleep 1' under
1026 # echo wakeup > current_tracer 921 # echo wakeup > current_tracer
1027 # echo latency-format > trace_options 922 # echo latency-format > trace_options
1028 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency 923 # echo 0 > tracing_max_latency
1029 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 924 # echo 1 > tracing_on
1030 # chrt -f 5 sleep 1 925 # chrt -f 5 sleep 1
1031 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 926 # echo 0 > tracing_on
1032 # cat trace 927 # cat trace
1033# tracer: wakeup 928# tracer: wakeup
1034# 929#
@@ -1140,9 +1035,9 @@ ftrace_enabled is set; otherwise this tracer is a nop.
1140 1035
1141 # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1 1036 # sysctl kernel.ftrace_enabled=1
1142 # echo function > current_tracer 1037 # echo function > current_tracer
1143 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 1038 # echo 1 > tracing_on
1144 # usleep 1 1039 # usleep 1
1145 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 1040 # echo 0 > tracing_on
1146 # cat trace 1041 # cat trace
1147# tracer: function 1042# tracer: function
1148# 1043#
@@ -1180,7 +1075,7 @@ int trace_fd;
1180[...] 1075[...]
1181int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { 1076int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
1182 [...] 1077 [...]
1183 trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_enabled"), O_WRONLY); 1078 trace_fd = open(tracing_file("tracing_on"), O_WRONLY);
1184 [...] 1079 [...]
1185 if (condition_hit()) { 1080 if (condition_hit()) {
1186 write(trace_fd, "0", 1); 1081 write(trace_fd, "0", 1);
@@ -1631,9 +1526,9 @@ If I am only interested in sys_nanosleep and hrtimer_interrupt:
1631 # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \ 1526 # echo sys_nanosleep hrtimer_interrupt \
1632 > set_ftrace_filter 1527 > set_ftrace_filter
1633 # echo function > current_tracer 1528 # echo function > current_tracer
1634 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 1529 # echo 1 > tracing_on
1635 # usleep 1 1530 # usleep 1
1636 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 1531 # echo 0 > tracing_on
1637 # cat trace 1532 # cat trace
1638# tracer: ftrace 1533# tracer: ftrace
1639# 1534#
@@ -1879,9 +1774,9 @@ different. The trace is live.
1879 # echo function > current_tracer 1774 # echo function > current_tracer
1880 # cat trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out & 1775 # cat trace_pipe > /tmp/trace.out &
1881[1] 4153 1776[1] 4153
1882 # echo 1 > tracing_enabled 1777 # echo 1 > tracing_on
1883 # usleep 1 1778 # usleep 1
1884 # echo 0 > tracing_enabled 1779 # echo 0 > tracing_on
1885 # cat trace 1780 # cat trace
1886# tracer: function 1781# tracer: function
1887# 1782#
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
index 5f77d94598dd..6d27ab8d6e9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt
@@ -42,11 +42,25 @@ Synopsis of kprobe_events
42 +|-offs(FETCHARG) : Fetch memory at FETCHARG +|- offs address.(**) 42 +|-offs(FETCHARG) : Fetch memory at FETCHARG +|- offs address.(**)
43 NAME=FETCHARG : Set NAME as the argument name of FETCHARG. 43 NAME=FETCHARG : Set NAME as the argument name of FETCHARG.
44 FETCHARG:TYPE : Set TYPE as the type of FETCHARG. Currently, basic types 44 FETCHARG:TYPE : Set TYPE as the type of FETCHARG. Currently, basic types
45 (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64) and string are supported. 45 (u8/u16/u32/u64/s8/s16/s32/s64), "string" and bitfield
46 are supported.
46 47
47 (*) only for return probe. 48 (*) only for return probe.
48 (**) this is useful for fetching a field of data structures. 49 (**) this is useful for fetching a field of data structures.
49 50
51Types
52-----
53Several types are supported for fetch-args. Kprobe tracer will access memory
54by given type. Prefix 's' and 'u' means those types are signed and unsigned
55respectively. Traced arguments are shown in decimal (signed) or hex (unsigned).
56String type is a special type, which fetches a "null-terminated" string from
57kernel space. This means it will fail and store NULL if the string container
58has been paged out.
59Bitfield is another special type, which takes 3 parameters, bit-width, bit-
60offset, and container-size (usually 32). The syntax is;
61
62 b<bit-width>@<bit-offset>/<container-size>
63
50 64
51Per-Probe Event Filtering 65Per-Probe Event Filtering
52------------------------- 66-------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
index 66f92d1194c1..a4efa0462f05 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/usbmon.txt
@@ -12,6 +12,10 @@ Controller Drivers (HCD). So, if HCD is buggy, the traces reported by
12usbmon may not correspond to bus transactions precisely. This is the same 12usbmon may not correspond to bus transactions precisely. This is the same
13situation as with tcpdump. 13situation as with tcpdump.
14 14
15Two APIs are currently implemented: "text" and "binary". The binary API
16is available through a character device in /dev namespace and is an ABI.
17The text API is deprecated since 2.6.35, but available for convenience.
18
15* How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces 19* How to use usbmon to collect raw text traces
16 20
17Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces 21Unlike the packet socket, usbmon has an interface which provides traces
@@ -162,39 +166,11 @@ Here is the list of words, from left to right:
162 not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make 166 not machine words, but really just a byte stream split into words to make
163 it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes. 167 it easier to read. Thus, the last word may contain from one to four bytes.
164 The length of collected data is limited and can be less than the data length 168 The length of collected data is limited and can be less than the data length
165 report in Data Length word. 169 reported in the Data Length word. In the case of an Isochronous input (Zi)
166 170 completion where the received data is sparse in the buffer, the length of
167Here is an example of code to read the data stream in a well known programming 171 the collected data can be greater than the Data Length value (because Data
168language: 172 Length counts only the bytes that were received whereas the Data words
169 173 contain the entire transfer buffer).
170class ParsedLine {
171 int data_len; /* Available length of data */
172 byte data[];
173
174 void parseData(StringTokenizer st) {
175 int availwords = st.countTokens();
176 data = new byte[availwords * 4];
177 data_len = 0;
178 while (st.hasMoreTokens()) {
179 String data_str = st.nextToken();
180 int len = data_str.length() / 2;
181 int i;
182 int b; // byte is signed, apparently?! XXX
183 for (i = 0; i < len; i++) {
184 // data[data_len] = Byte.parseByte(
185 // data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2),
186 // 16);
187 b = Integer.parseInt(
188 data_str.substring(i*2, i*2 + 2),
189 16);
190 if (b >= 128)
191 b *= -1;
192 data[data_len] = (byte) b;
193 data_len++;
194 }
195 }
196 }
197}
198 174
199Examples: 175Examples:
200 176
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
index 699b60e070d2..c40e3bab08fa 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/Zoran
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Card number: 4
130 130
131Note: No module for the mse3000 is available yet 131Note: No module for the mse3000 is available yet
132Note: No module for the vpx3224 is available yet 132Note: No module for the vpx3224 is available yet
133Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips (see i2c-id.h) 133Note: use encoder=X or decoder=X for non-default i2c chips
134 134
135=========================== 135===========================
136 136
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c
index cc96ee2666f2..7445caa26d05 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/page-types.c
+++ b/Documentation/vm/page-types.c
@@ -32,8 +32,20 @@
32#include <sys/types.h> 32#include <sys/types.h>
33#include <sys/errno.h> 33#include <sys/errno.h>
34#include <sys/fcntl.h> 34#include <sys/fcntl.h>
35#include <sys/mount.h>
36#include <sys/statfs.h>
37#include "../../include/linux/magic.h"
35 38
36 39
40#ifndef MAX_PATH
41# define MAX_PATH 256
42#endif
43
44#ifndef STR
45# define _STR(x) #x
46# define STR(x) _STR(x)
47#endif
48
37/* 49/*
38 * pagemap kernel ABI bits 50 * pagemap kernel ABI bits
39 */ 51 */
@@ -152,6 +164,12 @@ static const char *page_flag_names[] = {
152}; 164};
153 165
154 166
167static const char *debugfs_known_mountpoints[] = {
168 "/sys/kernel/debug",
169 "/debug",
170 0,
171};
172
155/* 173/*
156 * data structures 174 * data structures
157 */ 175 */
@@ -184,7 +202,7 @@ static int kpageflags_fd;
184static int opt_hwpoison; 202static int opt_hwpoison;
185static int opt_unpoison; 203static int opt_unpoison;
186 204
187static const char hwpoison_debug_fs[] = "/debug/hwpoison"; 205static char hwpoison_debug_fs[MAX_PATH+1];
188static int hwpoison_inject_fd; 206static int hwpoison_inject_fd;
189static int hwpoison_forget_fd; 207static int hwpoison_forget_fd;
190 208
@@ -464,21 +482,100 @@ static uint64_t kpageflags_flags(uint64_t flags)
464 return flags; 482 return flags;
465} 483}
466 484
485/* verify that a mountpoint is actually a debugfs instance */
486static int debugfs_valid_mountpoint(const char *debugfs)
487{
488 struct statfs st_fs;
489
490 if (statfs(debugfs, &st_fs) < 0)
491 return -ENOENT;
492 else if (st_fs.f_type != (long) DEBUGFS_MAGIC)
493 return -ENOENT;
494
495 return 0;
496}
497
498/* find the path to the mounted debugfs */
499static const char *debugfs_find_mountpoint(void)
500{
501 const char **ptr;
502 char type[100];
503 FILE *fp;
504
505 ptr = debugfs_known_mountpoints;
506 while (*ptr) {
507 if (debugfs_valid_mountpoint(*ptr) == 0) {
508 strcpy(hwpoison_debug_fs, *ptr);
509 return hwpoison_debug_fs;
510 }
511 ptr++;
512 }
513
514 /* give up and parse /proc/mounts */
515 fp = fopen("/proc/mounts", "r");
516 if (fp == NULL)
517 perror("Can't open /proc/mounts for read");
518
519 while (fscanf(fp, "%*s %"
520 STR(MAX_PATH)
521 "s %99s %*s %*d %*d\n",
522 hwpoison_debug_fs, type) == 2) {
523 if (strcmp(type, "debugfs") == 0)
524 break;
525 }
526 fclose(fp);
527
528 if (strcmp(type, "debugfs") != 0)
529 return NULL;
530
531 return hwpoison_debug_fs;
532}
533
534/* mount the debugfs somewhere if it's not mounted */
535
536static void debugfs_mount(void)
537{
538 const char **ptr;
539
540 /* see if it's already mounted */
541 if (debugfs_find_mountpoint())
542 return;
543
544 ptr = debugfs_known_mountpoints;
545 while (*ptr) {
546 if (mount(NULL, *ptr, "debugfs", 0, NULL) == 0) {
547 /* save the mountpoint */
548 strcpy(hwpoison_debug_fs, *ptr);
549 break;
550 }
551 ptr++;
552 }
553
554 if (*ptr == NULL) {
555 perror("mount debugfs");
556 exit(EXIT_FAILURE);
557 }
558}
559
467/* 560/*
468 * page actions 561 * page actions
469 */ 562 */
470 563
471static void prepare_hwpoison_fd(void) 564static void prepare_hwpoison_fd(void)
472{ 565{
473 char buf[100]; 566 char buf[MAX_PATH + 1];
567
568 debugfs_mount();
474 569
475 if (opt_hwpoison && !hwpoison_inject_fd) { 570 if (opt_hwpoison && !hwpoison_inject_fd) {
476 sprintf(buf, "%s/corrupt-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); 571 snprintf(buf, MAX_PATH, "%s/hwpoison/corrupt-pfn",
572 hwpoison_debug_fs);
477 hwpoison_inject_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY); 573 hwpoison_inject_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY);
478 } 574 }
479 575
480 if (opt_unpoison && !hwpoison_forget_fd) { 576 if (opt_unpoison && !hwpoison_forget_fd) {
481 sprintf(buf, "%s/unpoison-pfn", hwpoison_debug_fs); 577 snprintf(buf, MAX_PATH, "%s/hwpoison/unpoison-pfn",
578 hwpoison_debug_fs);
482 hwpoison_forget_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY); 579 hwpoison_forget_fd = checked_open(buf, O_WRONLY);
483 } 580 }
484} 581}
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
index 2d70d0d95108..97bae3c576c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/unevictable-lru.txt
@@ -84,8 +84,7 @@ indicate that the page is being managed on the unevictable list.
84 84
85The PG_unevictable flag is analogous to, and mutually exclusive with, the 85The PG_unevictable flag is analogous to, and mutually exclusive with, the
86PG_active flag in that it indicates on which LRU list a page resides when 86PG_active flag in that it indicates on which LRU list a page resides when
87PG_lru is set. The unevictable list is compile-time configurable based on the 87PG_lru is set.
88UNEVICTABLE_LRU Kconfig option.
89 88
90The Unevictable LRU infrastructure maintains unevictable pages on an additional 89The Unevictable LRU infrastructure maintains unevictable pages on an additional
91LRU list for a few reasons: 90LRU list for a few reasons:
diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
index 7fbbaf85f5b7..092e596a1301 100644
--- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt
@@ -189,13 +189,13 @@ ACPI
189 189
190PCI 190PCI
191 191
192 pci=off Don't use PCI 192 pci=off Don't use PCI
193 pci=conf1 Use conf1 access. 193 pci=conf1 Use conf1 access.
194 pci=conf2 Use conf2 access. 194 pci=conf2 Use conf2 access.
195 pci=rom Assign ROMs. 195 pci=rom Assign ROMs.
196 pci=assign-busses Assign busses 196 pci=assign-busses Assign busses
197 pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK 197 pci=irqmask=MASK Set PCI interrupt mask to MASK
198 pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan upto NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says. 198 pci=lastbus=NUMBER Scan up to NUMBER busses, no matter what the mptable says.
199 pci=noacpi Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing. 199 pci=noacpi Don't use ACPI to set up PCI interrupt routing.
200 200
201IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) 201IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
@@ -293,11 +293,6 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit)
293 293
294Debugging 294Debugging
295 295
296 oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process,
297 but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine.
298 This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions.
299 Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot.
300
301 kstack=N Print N words from the kernel stack in oops dumps. 296 kstack=N Print N words from the kernel stack in oops dumps.
302 297
303 pagefaulttrace Dump all page faults. Only useful for extreme debugging 298 pagefaulttrace Dump all page faults. Only useful for extreme debugging
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d21eb07fe943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SecurityBugs
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
1Chinese translated version of Documentation/SecurityBugs
2
3If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
4original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem
5communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
6help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
7or if there is a problem with the translation.
8
9Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
10---------------------------------------------------------------------
11Documentation/SecurityBugs 鐨勪腑鏂囩炕璇
12
13濡傛灉鎯宠瘎璁烘垨鏇存柊鏈枃鐨勫唴瀹癸紝璇风洿鎺ヨ仈绯诲師鏂囨。鐨勭淮鎶よ呫傚鏋滀綘浣跨敤鑻辨枃
14浜ゆ祦鏈夊洶闅剧殑璇濓紝涔熷彲浠ュ悜涓枃鐗堢淮鎶よ呮眰鍔┿傚鏋滄湰缈昏瘧鏇存柊涓嶅強鏃舵垨鑰呯炕
15璇戝瓨鍦ㄩ棶棰橈紝璇疯仈绯讳腑鏂囩増缁存姢鑰呫
16
17涓枃鐗堢淮鎶よ咃細 璐惧▉濞 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
18涓枃鐗堢炕璇戣咃細 璐惧▉濞 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
19涓枃鐗堟牎璇戣咃細 璐惧▉濞 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
20
21
22浠ヤ笅涓烘鏂
23---------------------------------------------------------------------
24Linux鍐呮牳寮鍙戣呰涓哄畨鍏ㄩ潪甯搁噸瑕併傚洜姝わ紝鎴戜滑鎯宠鐭ラ亾褰撲竴涓湁鍏充簬
25瀹夊叏鐨勬紡娲炶鍙戠幇鐨勬椂鍊欙紝骞朵笖瀹冨彲鑳戒細琚敖蹇殑淇鎴栬呭叕寮銆傝鎶婅繖涓畨鍏
26婕忔礊鎶ュ憡缁橪inux鍐呮牳瀹夊叏鍥㈤槦銆
27
281) 鑱旂郴
29
30linux鍐呮牳瀹夊叏鍥㈤槦鍙互閫氳繃email<security@kernel.org>鏉ヨ仈绯汇傝繖鏄
31涓缁勭嫭绔嬬殑瀹夊叏宸ヤ綔浜哄憳锛屽彲浠ュ府鍔╂敼鍠勬紡娲炴姤鍛婂苟涓斿叕甯冨拰鍙栨秷涓涓慨澶嶃傚畨
32鍏ㄥ洟闃熸湁鍙兘浼氫粠閮ㄥ垎鐨勭淮鎶よ呴偅閲屽紩杩涢澶栫殑甯姪鏉ヤ簡瑙e苟涓斾慨澶嶅畨鍏ㄦ紡娲炪
33褰撻亣鍒颁换浣曟紡娲烇紝鎵鑳芥彁渚涚殑淇℃伅瓒婂灏辫秺鑳借瘖鏂拰淇銆傚鏋滀綘涓嶆竻妤氫粈涔
34鏄湁甯姪鐨勪俊鎭紝閭e氨璇烽噸娓╀竴涓婻EPORTING-BUGS鏂囦欢涓殑姒傝堪杩囩▼銆備换
35浣曟敾鍑绘х殑浠g爜閮芥槸闈炲父鏈夌敤鐨勶紝鏈粡鎶ュ憡鑰呯殑鍚屾剰涓嶄細琚彇娑堬紝闄ら潪瀹冨凡缁
36琚叕甯冧簬浼椼
37
382) 鍏紑
39
40Linux鍐呮牳瀹夊叏鍥㈤槦鐨勫畻鏃ㄥ氨鏄拰婕忔礊鎻愪氦鑰呬竴璧峰鐞嗘紡娲炵殑瑙e喅鏂规鐩
41鍒板叕寮銆傛垜浠枩娆㈠敖蹇湴瀹屽叏鍏紑婕忔礊銆傚綋涓涓紡娲炴垨鑰呬慨澶嶈繕娌℃湁琚畬鍏ㄥ湴鐞
42瑙o紝瑙e喅鏂规娌℃湁閫氳繃娴嬭瘯鎴栬呬緵搴斿晢鍗忚皟锛屽彲浠ュ悎鐞嗗湴寤惰繜鍏紑銆傜劧鑰岋紝鎴戜滑
43鏈熸湜杩欎簺寤惰繜灏藉彲鑳界殑鐭簺锛屾槸鍙暟鐨勫嚑澶╋紝鑰屼笉鏄嚑涓槦鏈熸垨鑰呭嚑涓湀銆傚叕寮
44鏃ユ湡鏄氳繃瀹夊叏鍥㈤槦鍜屾紡娲炴彁渚涜呬互鍙婁緵搴斿晢娲借皥鍚庣殑缁撴灉銆傚叕寮鏃堕棿琛ㄦ槸浠庡緢
45鐭紙鐗规畩鐨勶紝瀹冨凡缁忚鍏紬鎵鐭ラ亾锛夊埌鍑犱釜鏄熸湡銆備綔涓轰竴涓熀鏈殑榛樿鏀跨瓥锛屾垜
46浠墍鏈熸湜閫氱煡鍏紬鐨勬棩鏈熸槸7澶╃殑瀹夋帓銆
47
483) 淇濆瘑鍗忚
49
50Linux鍐呮牳瀹夊叏鍥㈤槦涓嶆槸涓涓寮忕殑鍥綋锛屽洜姝や笉鑳藉姞鍏ヤ换浣曠殑淇濆瘑鍗忚銆
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..951415bbab0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmitChecklist
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
1Chinese translated version of Documentation/SubmitChecklist
2
3If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
4original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem
5communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for
6help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated
7or if there is a problem with the translation.
8
9Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
10---------------------------------------------------------------------
11Documentation/SubmitChecklist 的中文翻译
12
13如果想评论或更新本文的内容,请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
14交流有困难的话,也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
15译存在问题,请联系中文版维护者。
16
17中文版维护者: 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
18中文版翻译者: 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
19中文版校译者: 贾威威 Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
20
21
22以下为正文
23---------------------------------------------------------------------
24Linux内核提交清单
25~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
26
27这里有一些内核开发者应该做的基本事情,如果他们想看到自己的内核补丁提交
28被接受的更快。
29
30这些都是超出Documentation/SubmittingPatches文档里所提供的以及其他
31关于提交Linux内核补丁的说明。
32
331:如果你使用了一个功能那么就#include定义/声明那个功能的那个文件。
34 不要依靠其他间接引入定义/声明那个功能的头文件。
35
362:构建简洁适用或者更改CONFIG选项 =y,=m,或者=n。
37 不要有编译警告/错误, 不要有链接警告/错误。
38
392b:通过 allnoconfig, allmodconfig
40
412c:当使用 0=builddir 成功地构建
42
433:通过使用本地交叉编译工具或者其他一些构建产所,在多CPU框架上构建。
44
454:ppc64 是一个很好的检查交叉编译的框架,因为它往往把‘unsigned long’
46 当64位值来使用。
47
485:按照Documentation/CodingStyle文件里的详细描述,检查你补丁的整体风格。
49 使用补丁风格检查琐碎的违规(scripts/checkpatch.pl),审核员优先提交。
50 你应该调整遗留在你补丁中的所有违规。
51
526:任何更新或者改动CONFIG选项都不能打乱配置菜单。
53
547:所有的Kconfig选项更新都要有说明文字。
55
568:已经认真地总结了相关的Kconfig组合。这是很难通过测试做好的--脑力在这里下降。
57
589:检查具有简洁性。
59
6010:使用'make checkstack'和'make namespacecheck'检查,然后修改所找到的问题。
61 注意:堆栈检查不会明确地出现问题,但是任何的一个函数在堆栈上使用多于512字节
62 都要准备修改。
63
6411:包含kernel-doc到全局内核APIs文件。(不要求静态的函数,但是包含也无所谓。)
65 使用'make htmldocs'或者'make mandocs'来检查kernel-doc,然后修改任何
66 发现的问题。
67
6812:已经通过CONFIG_PREEMPT, CONFIG_DEBUG_PREEMPT,
69 CONFIG_DEBUG_SLAB, CONFIG_DEBUG_PAGEALLOC, CONFIG_DEBUG_MUTEXES,
70 CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK, CONFIG_DEBUG_SPINLOCK_SLEEP测试,并且同时都
71 使能。
72
7313:已经都构建并且使用或者不使用 CONFIG_SMP 和 CONFIG_PREEMPT测试执行时间。
74
7514:如果补丁影响IO/Disk,等等:已经通过使用或者不使用 CONFIG_LBDAF 测试。
76
7715:所有的codepaths已经行使所有lockdep启用功能。
78
7916:所有的/proc记录更新都要作成文件放在Documentation/目录下。
80
8117:所有的内核启动参数更新都被记录到Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt文件中。
82
8318:所有的模块参数更新都用MODULE_PARM_DESC()记录。
84
8519:所有的用户空间接口更新都被记录到Documentation/ABI/。查看Documentation/ABI/README
86 可以获得更多的信息。改变用户空间接口的补丁应该被邮件抄送给linux-api@vger.kernel.org。
87
8820:检查它是不是都通过`make headers_check'。
89
9021:已经通过至少引入slab和page-allocation失败检查。查看Documentation/fault-injection/。
91
9222:新加入的源码已经通过`gcc -W'(使用"make EXTRA_CFLAGS=-W")编译。这样将产生很多烦恼,
93 但是对于寻找漏洞很有益处,例如:"warning: comparison between signed and unsigned"。
94
9523:当它被合并到-mm补丁集后再测试,用来确定它是否还和补丁队列中的其他补丁一起工作以及在VM,VFS
96 和其他子系统中各个变化。
97
9824:所有的内存屏障{e.g., barrier(), rmb(), wmb()}需要在源代码中的一个注释来解释他们都是干什么的
99 以及原因。
100
10125:如果有任何输入输出控制的补丁被添加,也要更新Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt。
102
10326:如果你的更改代码依靠或者使用任何的内核APIs或者与下面的kconfig符号有关系的功能,你就要
104 使用相关的kconfig符号关闭, and/or =m(如果选项提供)[在同一时间不是所用的都启用,仅仅各个或者自由
105 组合他们]:
106
107 CONFIG_SMP, CONFIG_SYSFS, CONFIG_PROC_FS, CONFIG_INPUT, CONFIG_PCI,
108 CONFIG_BLOCK, CONFIG_PM, CONFIG_HOTPLUG, CONFIG_MAGIC_SYSRQ,
109 CONFIG_NET, CONFIG_INET=n (后一个使用 CONFIG_NET=y)
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
index 9a1a6e1ed09e..0f4385a62a49 100644
--- a/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/SubmittingPatches
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ http://userweb.kernel.org/~akpm/stuff/patch-scripts.tar.gz
100 100
101灏嗘敼鍔ㄦ媶鍒嗭紝閫昏緫绫讳技鐨勬斁鍒板悓涓涓ˉ涓佹枃浠堕噷銆 101灏嗘敼鍔ㄦ媶鍒嗭紝閫昏緫绫讳技鐨勬斁鍒板悓涓涓ˉ涓佹枃浠堕噷銆
102 102
103渚嬪锛屽鏋滀綘鐨勬敼鍔ㄩ噷鍚屾椂鏈塨ug淇鍜屾ц兘浼樺寲锛岄偅涔堟妸杩欎簺鏀瑰姩鍒嗗埌涓や釜鎴 103渚嬪锛屽鏋滀綘鐨勬敼鍔ㄩ噷鍚屾椂鏈塨ug淇鍜屾ц兘浼樺寲锛岄偅涔堟妸杩欎簺鏀瑰姩鍒嗗埌涓や釜鎴
104鑰呮洿澶氱殑琛ヤ竵鏂囦欢涓傚鏋滀綘鐨勬敼鍔ㄥ寘鍚API鐨勪慨鏀癸紝骞朵笖淇敼浜嗛┍鍔ㄧ▼搴忔潵閫 104鑰呮洿澶氱殑琛ヤ竵鏂囦欢涓傚鏋滀綘鐨勬敼鍔ㄥ寘鍚API鐨勪慨鏀癸紝骞朵笖淇敼浜嗛┍鍔ㄧ▼搴忔潵閫
105搴旇繖浜涙柊鐨凙PI锛岄偅涔堟妸杩欎簺淇敼鍒嗘垚涓や釜琛ヤ竵銆 105搴旇繖浜涙柊鐨凙PI锛岄偅涔堟妸杩欎簺淇敼鍒嗘垚涓や釜琛ヤ竵銆
106 106
@@ -230,7 +230,7 @@ pref("mailnews.display.disable_format_flowed_support", true);
230浜涘師鍥狅紝淇閿欒锛岄噸鏂版彁浜ゆ洿鏂板悗鐨勬敼鍔紝鏄綘鑷繁鐨勫伐浣溿 230浜涘師鍥狅紝淇閿欒锛岄噸鏂版彁浜ゆ洿鏂板悗鐨勬敼鍔紝鏄綘鑷繁鐨勫伐浣溿
231 231
232Linus涓嶇粰鍑轰换浣曡瘎璁哄氨鈥滀涪寮冣濅綘鐨勮ˉ涓佹槸甯歌鐨勪簨鎯呫傚湪绯荤粺涓繖鏍风殑浜嬫儏寰 232Linus涓嶇粰鍑轰换浣曡瘎璁哄氨鈥滀涪寮冣濅綘鐨勮ˉ涓佹槸甯歌鐨勪簨鎯呫傚湪绯荤粺涓繖鏍风殑浜嬫儏寰
233骞冲父銆傚鏋滀粬娌℃湁鎺ュ彈浣犵殑琛ヤ竵锛屼篃璁告槸鐢变簬浠ヤ笅鍘 233骞冲父銆傚鏋滀粬娌℃湁鎺ュ彈浣犵殑琛ヤ竵锛屼篃璁告槸鐢变簬浠ヤ笅鍘
234* 浣犵殑琛ヤ竵涓嶈兘鍦ㄦ渶鏂扮増鏈殑鍐呮牳涓婂共鍑鐨勬墦涓娿 234* 浣犵殑琛ヤ竵涓嶈兘鍦ㄦ渶鏂扮増鏈殑鍐呮牳涓婂共鍑鐨勬墦涓娿
235* 浣犵殑琛ヤ竵鍦 linux-kernel 閭欢鍒楄〃涓病鏈夊緱鍒板厖鍒嗙殑璁ㄨ銆 235* 浣犵殑琛ヤ竵鍦 linux-kernel 閭欢鍒楄〃涓病鏈夊緱鍒板厖鍒嗙殑璁ㄨ銆
236* 椋庢牸闂锛堝弬鐓х2灏忚妭锛 236* 椋庢牸闂锛堝弬鐓х2灏忚妭锛
diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4c4ce853577b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/magic-number.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
1Chinese translated version of Documentation/magic-number.txt
2
3If you have any comment or update to the content, please post to LKML directly.
4However, if you have problem communicating in English you can also ask the
5Chinese maintainer for help. Contact the Chinese maintainer, if this
6translation is outdated or there is problem with translation.
7
8Chinese maintainer: Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
9---------------------------------------------------------------------
10Documentation/magic-number.txt鐨勪腑鏂囩炕璇
11
12濡傛灉鎯宠瘎璁烘垨鏇存柊鏈枃鐨勫唴瀹癸紝璇风洿鎺ュ彂淇″埌LKML銆傚鏋滀綘浣跨敤鑻辨枃浜ゆ祦鏈夊洶闅剧殑璇濓紝涔熷彲
13浠ュ悜涓枃鐗堢淮鎶よ呮眰鍔┿傚鏋滄湰缈昏瘧鏇存柊涓嶅強鏃舵垨鑰呯炕璇戝瓨鍦ㄩ棶棰橈紝璇疯仈绯讳腑鏂囩増缁存姢鑰呫
14
15涓枃鐗堢淮鎶よ咃細 璐惧▉濞 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
16涓枃鐗堢炕璇戣咃細 璐惧▉濞 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
17涓枃鐗堟牎璇戣咃細 璐惧▉濞 Jia Wei Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com>
18
19浠ヤ笅涓烘鏂
20---------------------------------------------------------------------
21杩欎釜鏂囦欢鏄湁鍏冲綋鍓嶄娇鐢ㄧ殑榄旀湳鍊兼敞鍐岃〃銆傚綋浣犵粰涓涓粨鏋勬坊鍔犱簡涓涓瓟鏈硷紝浣犱篃搴旇鎶婅繖涓瓟鏈兼坊鍔犲埌杩欎釜鏂囦欢锛屽洜涓烘垜浠渶濂芥妸鐢ㄤ簬鍚勭缁撴瀯鐨勯瓟鏈肩粺涓璧锋潵銆
22
23浣跨敤榄旀湳鍊兼潵淇濇姢鍐呮牳鏁版嵁缁撴瀯鏄竴涓潪甯稿ソ鐨勪富鎰忋傝繖灏卞厑璁镐綘鍦ㄨ繍琛屾湡妫鏌(a)涓涓粨鏋勬槸鍚﹀凡缁忚鏀诲嚮锛屾垨鑰(b)浣犲凡缁忕粰涓涓緥琛岀▼搴忛氳繃浜嗕竴涓敊璇殑缁撴瀯銆傚悗涓绉嶆儏鍐电壒鍒湴鏈夌敤---鐗瑰埆鏄綋浣犻氳繃涓涓┖鎸囬拡鎸囧悜缁撴瀯浣撶殑鏃跺欍倀ty婧愮爜锛屼緥濡傦紝缁忓父閫氳繃鐗瑰畾椹卞姩浣跨敤杩欑鏂规硶骞朵笖鍙嶅鍦版帓鍒楃壒瀹氭柟闈㈢殑缁撴瀯銆
24
25浣跨敤榄旀湳鍊肩殑鏂规硶鏄湪缁撴瀯鐨勫紑濮嬪澹版槑鐨勶紝濡備笅锛
26
27struct tty_ldisc {
28 int magic;
29 ...
30};
31
32褰撲綘浠ュ悗缁欏唴鏍告坊鍔犲寮哄姛鑳界殑鏃跺欙紝璇烽伒瀹堣繖鏉¤鍒欙紒杩欐牱灏变細鑺傜渷鏁颁笉娓呯殑璋冭瘯鏃堕棿锛岀壒鍒槸涓浜涘彜鎬殑鎯呭喌锛屼緥濡傦紝鏁扮粍瓒呭嚭鑼冨洿骞朵笖閲嶆柊鍐欎簡瓒呭嚭閮ㄥ垎銆傞伒瀹堣繖涓鍒欙紝鈥繖浜涙儏鍐靛彲浠ヨ蹇熷湴锛屽畨鍏ㄥ湴閬垮厤銆
33
34 Theodore Ts'o
35 31 Mar 94
36
37缁欏綋鍓嶇殑Linux 2.1.55娣诲姞榄旀湳琛ㄣ
38
39 Michael Chastain
40 <mailto:mec@shout.net>
41 22 Sep 1997
42
43鐜板湪搴旇鏈鏂扮殑Linux 2.1.112.鍥犱负鍦ㄧ壒鎬у喕缁撴湡闂达紝涓嶈兘鍦2.2.x鍓嶆敼鍙樹换浣曚笢瑗裤傝繖浜涙潯鐩鏁板煙鎵鎺掑簭銆
44
45 Krzysztof G.Baranowski
46 <mailto: kgb@knm.org.pl>
47 29 Jul 1998
48
49鏇存柊榄旀湳琛ㄥ埌Linux 2.5.45銆傚垰濂借秺杩囩壒鎬у喕缁擄紝浣嗘槸鏈夊彲鑳借繕浼氭湁涓浜涙柊鐨勯瓟鏈煎湪2.6.x涔嬪墠铻嶅叆鍒板唴鏍镐腑銆
50
51 Petr Baudis
52 <pasky@ucw.cz>
53 03 Nov 2002
54
55鏇存柊榄旀湳琛ㄥ埌Linux 2.5.74銆
56
57 Fabian Frederick
58 <ffrederick@users.sourceforge.net>
59 09 Jul 2003
60
61榄旀湳鍚 鍦板潃 缁撴瀯 鎵鍦ㄦ枃浠
62===========================================================================
63PG_MAGIC 'P' pg_{read,write}_hdr include/linux/pg.h
64CMAGIC 0x0111 user include/linux/a.out.h
65MKISS_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x04bf mkiss_channel drivers/net/mkiss.h
66RISCOM8_MAGIC 0x0907 riscom_port drivers/char/riscom8.h
67SPECIALIX_MAGIC 0x0907 specialix_port drivers/char/specialix_io8.h
68HDLC_MAGIC 0x239e n_hdlc drivers/char/n_hdlc.c
69APM_BIOS_MAGIC 0x4101 apm_user arch/i386/kernel/apm.c
70CYCLADES_MAGIC 0x4359 cyclades_port include/linux/cyclades.h
71DB_MAGIC 0x4442 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
72DL_MAGIC 0x444d fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
73FASYNC_MAGIC 0x4601 fasync_struct include/linux/fs.h
74FF_MAGIC 0x4646 fc_info drivers/net/iph5526_novram.c
75ISICOM_MAGIC 0x4d54 isi_port include/linux/isicom.h
76PTY_MAGIC 0x5001 drivers/char/pty.c
77PPP_MAGIC 0x5002 ppp include/linux/if_pppvar.h
78SERIAL_MAGIC 0x5301 async_struct include/linux/serial.h
79SSTATE_MAGIC 0x5302 serial_state include/linux/serial.h
80SLIP_MAGIC 0x5302 slip drivers/net/slip.h
81STRIP_MAGIC 0x5303 strip drivers/net/strip.c
82X25_ASY_MAGIC 0x5303 x25_asy drivers/net/x25_asy.h
83SIXPACK_MAGIC 0x5304 sixpack drivers/net/hamradio/6pack.h
84AX25_MAGIC 0x5316 ax_disp drivers/net/mkiss.h
85ESP_MAGIC 0x53ee esp_struct drivers/char/esp.h
86TTY_MAGIC 0x5401 tty_struct include/linux/tty.h
87MGSL_MAGIC 0x5401 mgsl_info drivers/char/synclink.c
88TTY_DRIVER_MAGIC 0x5402 tty_driver include/linux/tty_driver.h
89MGSLPC_MAGIC 0x5402 mgslpc_info drivers/char/pcmcia/synclink_cs.c
90TTY_LDISC_MAGIC 0x5403 tty_ldisc include/linux/tty_ldisc.h
91USB_SERIAL_MAGIC 0x6702 usb_serial drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h
92FULL_DUPLEX_MAGIC 0x6969 drivers/net/tulip/de2104x.c
93USB_BLUETOOTH_MAGIC 0x6d02 usb_bluetooth drivers/usb/class/bluetty.c
94RFCOMM_TTY_MAGIC 0x6d02 net/bluetooth/rfcomm/tty.c
95USB_SERIAL_PORT_MAGIC 0x7301 usb_serial_port drivers/usb/serial/usb-serial.h
96CG_MAGIC 0x00090255 ufs_cylinder_group include/linux/ufs_fs.h
97A2232_MAGIC 0x000a2232 gs_port drivers/char/ser_a2232.h
98RPORT_MAGIC 0x00525001 r_port drivers/char/rocket_int.h
99LSEMAGIC 0x05091998 lse drivers/fc4/fc.c
100GDTIOCTL_MAGIC 0x06030f07 gdth_iowr_str drivers/scsi/gdth_ioctl.h
101RIEBL_MAGIC 0x09051990 drivers/net/atarilance.c
102RIO_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/rio/rio_linux.c
103SX_MAGIC 0x12345678 gs_port drivers/char/sx.h
104NBD_REQUEST_MAGIC 0x12560953 nbd_request include/linux/nbd.h
105RED_MAGIC2 0x170fc2a5 (any) mm/slab.c
106BAYCOM_MAGIC 0x19730510 baycom_state drivers/net/baycom_epp.c
107ISDN_X25IFACE_MAGIC 0x1e75a2b9 isdn_x25iface_proto_data
108 drivers/isdn/isdn_x25iface.h
109ECP_MAGIC 0x21504345 cdkecpsig include/linux/cdk.h
110LSOMAGIC 0x27091997 lso drivers/fc4/fc.c
111LSMAGIC 0x2a3b4d2a ls drivers/fc4/fc.c
112WANPIPE_MAGIC 0x414C4453 sdla_{dump,exec} include/linux/wanpipe.h
113CS_CARD_MAGIC 0x43525553 cs_card sound/oss/cs46xx.c
114LABELCL_MAGIC 0x4857434c labelcl_info_s include/asm/ia64/sn/labelcl.h
115ISDN_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 modem_info include/linux/isdn.h
116CTC_ASYNC_MAGIC 0x49344C01 ctc_tty_info drivers/s390/net/ctctty.c
117ISDN_NET_MAGIC 0x49344C02 isdn_net_local_s drivers/isdn/i4l/isdn_net_lib.h
118SAVEKMSG_MAGIC2 0x4B4D5347 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c
119STLI_BOARDMAGIC 0x4bc6c825 stlibrd include/linux/istallion.h
120CS_STATE_MAGIC 0x4c4f4749 cs_state sound/oss/cs46xx.c
121SLAB_C_MAGIC 0x4f17a36d kmem_cache mm/slab.c
122COW_MAGIC 0x4f4f4f4d cow_header_v1 arch/um/drivers/ubd_user.c
123I810_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E i810_card sound/oss/i810_audio.c
124TRIDENT_CARD_MAGIC 0x5072696E trident_card sound/oss/trident.c
125ROUTER_MAGIC 0x524d4157 wan_device include/linux/wanrouter.h
126SCC_MAGIC 0x52696368 gs_port drivers/char/scc.h
127SAVEKMSG_MAGIC1 0x53415645 savekmsg arch/*/amiga/config.c
128GDA_MAGIC 0x58464552 gda arch/mips/include/asm/sn/gda.h
129RED_MAGIC1 0x5a2cf071 (any) mm/slab.c
130STL_PORTMAGIC 0x5a7182c9 stlport include/linux/stallion.h
131EEPROM_MAGIC_VALUE 0x5ab478d2 lanai_dev drivers/atm/lanai.c
132HDLCDRV_MAGIC 0x5ac6e778 hdlcdrv_state include/linux/hdlcdrv.h
133EPCA_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel include/linux/epca.h
134PCXX_MAGIC 0x5c6df104 channel drivers/char/pcxx.h
135KV_MAGIC 0x5f4b565f kernel_vars_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/klkernvars.h
136I810_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 i810_state sound/oss/i810_audio.c
137TRIDENT_STATE_MAGIC 0x63657373 trient_state sound/oss/trident.c
138M3_CARD_MAGIC 0x646e6f50 m3_card sound/oss/maestro3.c
139FW_HEADER_MAGIC 0x65726F66 fw_header drivers/atm/fore200e.h
140SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267321 slot drivers/hotplug/cpqphp.h
141SLOT_MAGIC 0x67267322 slot drivers/hotplug/acpiphp.h
142LO_MAGIC 0x68797548 nbd_device include/linux/nbd.h
143OPROFILE_MAGIC 0x6f70726f super_block drivers/oprofile/oprofilefs.h
144M3_STATE_MAGIC 0x734d724d m3_state sound/oss/maestro3.c
145STL_PANELMAGIC 0x7ef621a1 stlpanel include/linux/stallion.h
146VMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654320 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c
147KMALLOC_MAGIC 0x87654321 snd_alloc_track sound/core/memory.c
148PWC_MAGIC 0x89DC10AB pwc_device drivers/usb/media/pwc.h
149NBD_REPLY_MAGIC 0x96744668 nbd_reply include/linux/nbd.h
150STL_BOARDMAGIC 0xa2267f52 stlbrd include/linux/stallion.h
151ENI155_MAGIC 0xa54b872d midway_eprom drivers/atm/eni.h
152SCI_MAGIC 0xbabeface gs_port drivers/char/sh-sci.h
153CODA_MAGIC 0xC0DAC0DA coda_file_info include/linux/coda_fs_i.h
154DPMEM_MAGIC 0xc0ffee11 gdt_pci_sram drivers/scsi/gdth.h
155STLI_PORTMAGIC 0xe671c7a1 stliport include/linux/istallion.h
156YAM_MAGIC 0xF10A7654 yam_port drivers/net/hamradio/yam.c
157CCB_MAGIC 0xf2691ad2 ccb drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c
158QUEUE_MAGIC_FREE 0xf7e1c9a3 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
159QUEUE_MAGIC_USED 0xf7e1cc33 queue_entry drivers/scsi/arm/queue.c
160HTB_CMAGIC 0xFEFAFEF1 htb_class net/sched/sch_htb.c
161NMI_MAGIC 0x48414d4d455201 nmi_s arch/mips/include/asm/sn/nmi.h
162
163璇锋敞鎰忥紝鍦ㄥ0闊宠蹇嗙鐞嗕腑浠嶇劧鏈夋瘡涓浜涜瀹氫箟鐨勯┍鍔ㄩ瓟鏈笺傛煡鐪媔nclude/sound/sndmagic.h鏉ヨ幏鍙栦粬浠畬鏁寸殑鍒楄〃淇℃伅銆傚緢澶歄SS澹伴煶椹卞姩鎷ユ湁鑷繁浠庡0鍗CI ID鏋勫缓鐨勯瓟鏈-浠栦滑涔熸病鏈夎鍒楀湪杩欓噷銆
164
165IrDA瀛愮郴缁熶篃浣跨敤浜嗗ぇ閲忕殑鑷繁鐨勯瓟鏈硷紝鏌ョ湅include/net/irda/irda.h鏉ヨ幏鍙栦粬浠畬鏁寸殑淇℃伅銆
166
167HFS鏄彟澶栦竴涓瘮杈冨ぇ鐨勪娇鐢ㄩ瓟鏈肩殑鏂囦欢绯荤粺-浣犲彲浠ュ湪fs/hfs/hfs.h涓壘鍒颁粬浠